JP5871229B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that, when a lottery opportunity occurs during a game, displays a symbol in a manner that displays a result of a lottery after a symbol change display.

  Conventionally, as this type of gaming machine, a larger number (same) is displayed from the combination of three effect symbols with the same predetermined number displayed at the end of the variable display effect with the effect symbol at the time of big hit There is known a gaming machine that performs a promotion effect such as changing to a combination of three effect symbols made (for example, Patent Document 1).

  In the technique of Patent Document 1, a display result is scheduled to be derived and displayed (result display effect) with a combination of effect symbols (for example, display modes corresponding to jackpots) in which three specific numbers are displayed in the display screen. If there is a temporary stop display with a combination of numbers that are smaller than the specific number (or the same number), a reach effect will be performed from a tempered state in which the two numbers are combined, reach effect In the case where a turning effect such as whether or not to become a tempered state is executed before, a setting is made such that the turning effect is executed based on the small number.

JP 2011-024882 A

  However, according to the technique of Patent Document 1, for example, when a combination of tempering states is selected that is larger than a specific number, the number is forcibly changed to a smaller number, or a tempering effect that is performed before the reach effect. However, in order to achieve consistency with the combination of numbers in the tempering state, it was necessary to limit the production of the sword.

  That is, if the specific number at the time of the big hit is a small value such as “2”, for example, only the tempering effect related to the number “2” can be selected for consistency with the combination of the tempered states. There wasn't. Therefore, the tempering effect that can be selected is limited, the range of the effect of the gaming machine cannot be expanded, and further, there is a possibility that the interest of the player cannot be improved. Furthermore, even in the case of a loss, for example, when a result display effect is scheduled to be performed with a combination of numbers such as “1”-“5”-“7”, any type of effect is selected. There was a possibility that it could not be combined, and therefore, it was not possible to select the production effect.

  Then, this invention makes it a subject to provide the technique which can select a roaring effect, without depending on the combination aspect of the effect design at the time of a result display effect.

The present invention employs the following means for solving the above problems. In addition, the wording in the following brackets is an illustration to the last, and this invention is not limited to this.
Solution 1: The gaming machine according to the present invention has a lottery execution means for executing an internal lottery relating to a player's profit on the condition that a predetermined lottery opportunity has occurred during the game, and the internal lottery by the lottery execution means. Is executed, the symbol display means for displaying the symbol in a manner representing the result of the internal lottery after the symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined fluctuation time, and the symbol by the symbol display means In the variable display of the symbol, the symbol display means displays the symbol by the symbol display means after executing a variable display effect that displays a plurality of effect symbols combined with each other in correspondence with the symbol variable display within the variation time. A design effect executing means for executing a result display effect for stopping and displaying all of the plurality of effect symbols in an overall combination mode corresponding to the mode, and executing the symbol effect A variation display effect pattern defining means for preliminarily defining a plurality of variable display effect patterns including a special variation display effect pattern, and a variation of the plurality of effect symbols by the symbol effect executing means. With respect to the display effect, the variable display effect pattern selecting unit that selects any one of the plurality of variable display effect patterns defined by the variable display effect pattern defining unit, and the variable display effect pattern selecting unit When a special variable display effect pattern is selected, during the variable display effect executed by the symbol effect executing means, the stop in effect in an intermediate combination mode using at least a part of the plurality of effect symbols After executing the specific stop display effect during the change to the display state, the change of the plurality of effect symbols again A special variation display effect executing means for starting a display effect, and a combination of the results display effects executed by the symbol effect executing means using the overall combination mode composed of all of the effect symbols. With respect to the variation display effect executed by the effect design stop eye defining means and the design effect executing means for predefining a plurality of combinations of the effect symbols constituting the aspect in advance, the variation display effect pattern selecting means by the variation display effect pattern selecting means After the selection of the variable display effect pattern, any one of the combinations of the plurality of combinations defined by the effect symbol stop eye defining means for the combination pattern of the effect symbols constituting the overall combination aspect in the result display effect And an effect design stop eye selection means for selecting one It is a gaming machine to play.

A game by the gaming machine of the present invention proceeds, for example, along the flow shown below.
(1) When a lottery opportunity occurs during a game (a winning at the upper start winning opening, a winning at the lower starting winning opening), a lottery element necessary for (used for) the internal lottery is acquired. In order to execute the internal lottery, a lottery opportunity must be generated as a precondition. For this reason, the player plays a game with the initial goal of generating this lottery opportunity. A lottery opportunity occurs randomly (or accidentally or randomly). When a lottery opportunity occurs randomly, a lottery element is acquired each time.

(2) The lottery elements acquired by (1) above are stored in the order of acquisition. However, a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four symbols per symbol if there are a plurality of symbols) is provided for the number of memories, and the number of memories does not increase beyond this upper limit.

(3) The lottery elements stored in (2) above are consumed (used), and the internal lottery (special symbol lottery) is executed. Therefore, the lottery element is consumed every time the internal lottery is performed.

(4) When the internal lottery of (3) is executed, the symbol (special symbol) is variably displayed over a predetermined variation time, and the symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner representing the result of the internal lottery. It takes a certain amount of time (fluctuation time and stop display time) from the start of the symbol display to the stop display. Once the symbol display is started, the stop display is completed. The next lottery will not be held until

(5) The effect symbol change display effect (effect symbol scroll display) is executed within the display screen within the change time of (4) above, and the effect symbol stop display within the stop display time of (4) above. Production (stop display of production symbol) is executed.

(6) When executing the internal lottery of (3) above, not only the result of the internal lottery but also the winning symbol and the symbol variation pattern are determined. Based on the variation pattern, the variation display effect pattern related to the variation display effect of the effect symbol (4) is also determined. Here, the variable display effect pattern is determined by selecting one of a plurality of types of variable display effect patterns including a special variable display effect pattern.

(7) When a special variable display effect pattern is selected by the selection of the variable display effect pattern in (6) above, a tempering state may occur during the variable display effect of the effect symbol in (5) above. Production will be performed. The number of tempering effects is not limited to one, and a plurality of tempering effects are prepared.

(8) After selection of the variable display effect pattern of (6) above, a combination of effect symbols to be stopped in the display screen at the time of the effect display effect (stop display effect) of the effect symbol of (5) above. decide. This combination is determined based on a pattern selected from one of a plurality of effect pattern combinations.

  As described above, according to the present solution, when a special variation display effect pattern is selected, the fly effect is executed during the variation display effect related to the effect symbol performed during the variation display of the special symbol. Is determined first. In addition, after the variable display effect pattern is selected, the combination pattern of the effect symbols at the time of the result display effect relating to the effect symbol performed during the stop display of the special symbol is determined. Specifically, after it is decided to execute the squealing effect (for example, the push effect by the middle / right effect symbol), the combination of the effect symbols at the time of the result display effect (for example, “7”-“7”-“7”) Is determined.

For this reason, since the turn-up effect is not selected on the basis of the combination pattern of the effect designs at the time of the result display effect, the turn-up effect is not selected from the limited turn-up effects. You can choose from. Therefore, depending on the variation display effect by the effect design, not only the limited effect but also various effects can be executed, and the range of game play can be widened. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with a wide range of game playability to the player, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.
According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the effect performed during the stop display of the symbol after confirming in advance whether or not to execute the effect on the variation display effect content of the effect symbol performed during the symbol variation display. Since the combination of effect symbols in the result display effect of the symbols can be determined, it is possible to execute the roaring effect without depending on the combination pattern of the effect symbols in the result display effect.

  Solution 2: The gaming machine according to the present invention selects the special variable display effect pattern by the variable display effect pattern selection means at the start of the variable display effect executed by the symbol effect execution means. If so, the effect symbol stop eye selection means selects the combination pattern of the effect symbols constituting the intermediate combination aspect of the specific stop display effect during change executed by the special change display effect execution means. Effect design special stop eye setting means for setting the type of each effect symbol constituting the effect pattern combination pattern as a new effect symbol combination pattern reorganized based on the special variable display effect pattern It is a gaming machine characterized by comprising.

The following features are added to the gaming machine of this solution.
(9) After the determination of the combination of effect symbols to be stopped in the display screen at the time of the effect display effect (stop display effect) of (8) above, the combination of effect symbols at the start of the roaring effect is determined. decide. Note that this combination is determined based on a combination of effect symbols selected from a plurality of effect symbols based on a combination of effects at the time of the result display effect (at the time of stop display effect). become.

  As described above, according to the present solution, when a special variable display effect pattern, that is, a pattern in which a variable display effect including a turn effect by the effect symbol is executed is selected, the result regarding the effect symbol Based on the combination of effect symbols at the time of the display effect, the combination of effect symbols at the start of the roaring effect is determined. Specifically, after it is decided to execute the squealing effect (for example, the push effect by the middle / right effect symbol), the combination of the effect symbols at the time of the result display effect (for example, “7”-“7”-“7”) As a result, the combination of effect symbols at the start of the roaring effect (for example, “7”-“7”-“8”) is determined based on the combination of effect symbols at the time of the display effect. At that time, the combination of effect symbols (for example, “7”-“blank”-“7”) is automatically determined at the end of the roaring effect (at the start of the reach effect).

  For this reason, it is possible to eliminate the inconsistency in the combination of effect designs at the time of the result display effect or the start of the reach effect and the start of the turn effect.

  Solution 3: The gaming machine of the present invention is the solution 2, wherein the variable display effect pattern defining means predefines a plurality of types of the special variable display effect patterns in a plurality of variable display effect patterns. The contents of the correction data used for the reorganization of the types of effect symbols constituting the pattern of the effect symbols combined by the effect symbol special stop eye setting means are individually classified into a plurality of types of the special variable display effect patterns. At the start of the variable display effect executed by the symbol effect executing means and the correction data defining means that preliminarily define a plurality of ways in correspondence, the variable display effect pattern selecting means selects any kind of the special variable display. When an effect pattern is selected, it is selected from the plurality of correction data defined by the correction data defining means. Correction data selecting means for selecting correction data having contents corresponding to the type of the special variable display effect pattern, wherein the effect symbol special stop eye setting means is the correction selected by the correction data selecting means. Based on the content of the data, reorganizing the types of each effect symbol constituting the combination pattern of the effect symbols selected by the effect symbol stop eye selection means, and setting as a new combination pattern of the effect symbols It is a featured gaming machine.

The following features are added to the gaming machine of this solution.
(10) When determining the combination of effects at the start of the above-mentioned (9) production effect, correction data corresponding to the type of production effect is specified (prepared) in advance. Specifically, after it is decided to execute the squealing effect (for example, the chase effect by the left and right effect symbols), the combination of the effect symbols at the time of the result display effect (for example, “7”-“7”-“7”) As a result, when determining the combination of the production symbol at the start of the production effect based on the combination of the production design at the time of the display production, based on the “chase production by the left and right production design” which is the type of production effect Correction data (left effect symbol correction “L (left effect symbol type at the time of result display effect) -4 (sequentially four types before)”, medium effect symbol correction “during variable display”, right effect symbol correction “L-4”). Using this correction data, the left effect symbol is set to “3” (7-4), the middle effect symbol is set to “variable display”, and the right effect symbol is set to “3” for the combination at the start of the roaring effect. "(7-4)". At that time, the combination of effect symbols (for example, “7”-“blank”-“7”) is automatically determined at the end of the roaring effect (at the start of the reach effect).

  For this reason, by using the correction data, it is possible to simplify the reorganization of the combination of effect symbols at the time of the result display effect (at the time of stop display effect).

  Solving means 4: The gaming machine of the present invention is the solving means 3, wherein the correction data defining means is a combination of the new effect symbols set by reorganizing the types of effect symbols by the effect symbol special stop eye setting means. While defining normal correction data (including a tempei and a chance eye) that makes a pattern different from the combination of the effect symbols selected by the effect symbol stop eye selection means, the effect symbols A new combination pattern of the effect symbols set by reorganization of each effect symbol type by the special stop eye setting means and the combination pattern of the effect symbols selected by the effect symbol stop eye selection means are the same. Special correction data (not including tempei, final stop) It is.

The following features are added to the gaming machine of this solution.
(11) When referring to the correction data of (10) above, correction data based on the type of the roaring effect is referred to, but for a specific roaring effect, the combination of the effect symbol at the result display effect and the start of the roaring effect There may be a case where the combination of effect designs at the time is the same. Specifically, after it is decided to execute the squealing effect (for example, the push effect by the middle / right effect symbol), the combination of the effect symbols at the time of the result display effect (for example, “7”-“7”-“8”) As a result, when determining the combination of the production symbols at the start of the production effect based on the combination of the production designs at the time of the display production, based on the “pushing production by the left / middle production design” which is the type of production effect Correction data (left effect symbol correction “L (type of left effect symbol during result display effect)”, middle effect symbol correction “L (type of left effect symbol during result display effect)”, right effect symbol correction “L Refer to “(type of left effect design at the time of result display effect) +1 (type after one in order).” With this correction data, the left effect design is set to “7” for the combination at the start of the turn effect. And set the medium design to `` Is set to ", the right performance symbols can be set to" 8 "(7 + 1).

  In this way, in the present solution, by specifying correction data corresponding to the roaring effect at any variation display effect, such as at the time of big hit, off, performing the reach effect, not executing the reach effect, etc. Further, the reorganization of the combination of effect symbols at the time of the result display effect (at the time of the stop display effect) can be simplified, and the inconsistency of the effect symbol combinations at the time of the result display effect and the start of the turn effect can be eliminated.

  Solution 5: In the gaming machine of the present invention, in any of Solution 1 to 4, the effect symbol stop eye selection means is a combination pattern of the effect symbols that constitutes an overall combination aspect in the result display effect. The selection of the special variation display among a plurality of combinations of patterns defined by the production symbol stop eye defining means based on the special fluctuation display production pattern selected by the fluctuation display production pattern selection means. The game machine is characterized in that any one having relevance with the performance pattern is selected.

The following features are added to the gaming machine of this solution.
(12) When determining the combination of effect designs at the time of the result display effect (at the time of stop display effect) of (8) above, it corresponds to the variable display effect pattern (the type of roaring effect) selected at (6) above. It is selected from combination patterns. Specifically, when it is decided to execute a squealing effect (for example, a chase effect by the left / right effect design), the combination pattern of the effect design at the time of the result display effect (for example, at the time of detachment, When not executed, ten types are prepared, and one of the ten types (for example, “7”-“7”-“8”) is determined.

  In this way, by pre-defining (preparing) the combination pattern of the effect symbols at the time of the result display effect corresponding to the turn effect, the selection of the effect symbol combination pattern at the result display effect is simplified, and at the time of the result display effect. It is possible to eliminate the inconsistency in the combination of production symbols with the start of the production production.

  Solution 6: The gaming machine according to the present invention is the game machine according to any one of solutions 1 to 5, wherein a variation pattern defining unit that preliminarily defines a plurality of variation patterns of the variation display of the symbol by the symbol display unit; A variation pattern determining means for selectively determining one of the plurality of variation patterns defined by the variation pattern defining means when starting the variation display of the symbol by the display means; and the variation When the variation pattern determined by the pattern determining unit satisfies a predetermined reach generation condition, the variation display further includes a reach effect executing unit that executes a reach effect during execution of the variable display effect by the symbol effect executing unit, When the predetermined variation display effect pattern is selected by the effect pattern selection means, the reach A gaming machine characterized in that a probability selected when a reach effect is scheduled to be executed by the output execution means and a probability selected when a reach effect is not scheduled to be executed by the reach effect executing means are different. .

The following features are added to the gaming machine of this solution.
(13) When the variable display effect pattern (the type of roaring effect) of (6) is selected, the probability that the variable display effect pattern is selected differs depending on whether or not the reach effect is executed. That is, the probability that the reach effect is executed after the beat effect varies depending on the type of the beat effect. Specifically, when the squeeze effect A (for example, the press effect by the middle / right effect design) is selected, the probability that the reach effect is executed after the squeeze effect A is 80%, whereas the squeak effect B ( For example, when the chase effect based on the left / right effect symbol is selected, the probability that the reach effect is executed after the turn effect B is set to be different from 20%.

  In this way, by changing the probability of whether or not the reach effect is executed according to the selected roaring effect, that is, whether or not the effect pattern becomes the tempered state (reach state), the tempered effect is changed to the tempered state. The degree of expectation that it may become can be varied, and the interest of the game can be improved.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, without depending on the combination aspect of Starring output symbols, it is possible to perform the tilt effect.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which expands and shows a part of game board. It is a block diagram which shows the various electronic devices with which the pachinko machine was equipped. It is a flowchart (1/2) which shows the example of a procedure of a reset start process. It is a flowchart (2/2) which shows the example of a procedure of a reset start process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a power-off occurrence check process concretely. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an interruption management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a switch input event process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a 1st special symbol memory update process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a 2nd special symbol memory update process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the production | presentation determination process at the time of acquisition. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a special symbol game process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the special symbol change pre-processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table (normal mode and search mode) at the time of loss. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table at the time of loss (crown mode). It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table (chance mode) at the time of loss. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table (rush mode) at the time of loss. It is a figure which shows the structure column of a probability state selection table. It is a figure which shows the structure row | line | column of the special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table (normal state and probability state designation | designated value = 1). It is a figure which shows the structure row | line | column of the special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table (time reduction state and probability state designation | designated value = 1). It is a figure which shows the structure row | line | column of the special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table (normal state and probability state designation | designated value = 0). It is a figure which shows the structure row | line | column of the special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table (time reduction state and probability state designation | designated value = 0). It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit hour fluctuation pattern selection table (normal mode and search mode). It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit hour fluctuation pattern selection table (crown mode). It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit hour fluctuation pattern selection table (chance mode). It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit hour fluctuation pattern selection table (rush mode). It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a special symbol memory | storage area shift process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the special symbol stop display process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a mode management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a main control mode status update process. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a display output management process. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a variable winning apparatus management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a big winning opening opening pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a big prize opening / closing operation | movement process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a big winning opening closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an end process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a mode setting process. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed in a pachinko machine. It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the 1st normal fluctuation display effect corresponding to the change display and stop display of a special symbol. It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the 2nd normal fluctuation display effect corresponding to the change display and stop display of a special symbol (1/3). It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the 2nd normal fluctuation display effect corresponding to the change display and stop display of a special symbol (2/3). It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the 2nd normal fluctuation display effect corresponding to the change display and stop display of a special symbol (3/3). It is a continuation figure which shows in part an example of a big-game effect performed during a big hit game in the case of “16 round big hit”. It is a continuation figure which shows the example of production of rush mode. It is a continuation figure which shows the example of prefetch production in rush mode (the 1). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of prefetch effect in the rush mode (the 2). It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the 1st special fluctuation display effect corresponding to the fluctuation display of a special symbol (1/4). It is a continuation figure showing an example of the 1st special change display production corresponding to change display of special symbols (2/4). It is a continuation figure showing an example of the 1st special change display production corresponding to change display of special symbols (3/4). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the 1st special change display production corresponding to the change display of special symbols (4/4). It is a continuation figure showing the example of the 2nd special change display production corresponding to change display of special symbols (1/2). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the 2nd special change display production corresponding to the change display of special symbols (2/2). It is a continuation figure showing an example of the 3rd special change display production corresponding to change display of special symbols. It is a continuation figure showing an example of the 4th special change display production corresponding to change display of special symbols (1/2). It is a continuation figure showing an example of the 4th special change display production corresponding to change display of special symbols (2/2). It is a continuation figure showing an example of the 5th special change display production corresponding to change display of special symbols (1/2). It is a continuation figure showing an example of the 5th special change display production corresponding to change display of special symbols (2/2). It is a continuation figure showing an example of the 6th special change display production corresponding to change display of special symbols (1/2). It is a continuation figure showing an example of the 6th special change display production corresponding to change display of special symbols (2/2). It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of effect control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an operation | movement memory production | presentation management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a destination determination effect management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the said change effect content prior determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of effect design management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an effect design change pre-process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the fluctuation | variation effect pattern selection process at the time of loss. It is a figure which shows an example of a roaring effect pattern selection table. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the effect design lottery process at the time of a loss. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect symbol combination pattern selection table for the non-turning effect at the time of detachment. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect symbol combination pattern selection table for the non-reaming effect at the time of non-reach. It is a figure which shows the effect symbol combination pattern selection table A for the effect at the time of a detachment at the time of a loss. It is a figure which shows the effect symbol combination pattern selection table B for reach at the time of detachment. It is a figure which shows the effect symbol combination pattern selection table C for the reach at the time of a detachment. It is a figure which shows the effect symbol combination pattern selection table A for the non-reach-time production effect at the time of detachment. It is a figure which shows the effect symbol combination pattern selection table B for non-reach-time production effect at the time of a loss. It is a figure which shows the effect symbol combination pattern selection table C for the effect of a non-reach at the time of detachment. It is a figure which shows the effect symbol combination pattern selection table D for the non-reach time turning effect at the time of detachment. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect design correction data table at the time of a start effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect design correction data table at the time of the end of a roaring effect. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a big hit hour variation production pattern selection process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a big hit effect design lottery process. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation symbol combination pattern selection table A at the time of big hit. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation symbol combination pattern selection table B at the time of big hit. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect symbol combination pattern selection table for re-lottery effects in the case of big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the variation effect pattern selection process at the time of a loss in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the reach effect pattern selection table for reach in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the non-reach-time turning effect pattern selection table in 2nd Embodiment.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter abbreviated as “pachinko machine”) 1. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 uses a game ball as a game medium, and a player borrows a game ball from a game hall operator to play a game with the pachinko machine 1. In the game of the pachinko machine 1, each game ball is a medium having a game value, and a privilege (profit) that the player enjoys as a result of the game is, for example, a game ball acquired by the player Based on the number of games, it can be converted into a game value. The overall configuration of the gaming machine will be described below with reference to FIGS.

[Overall configuration of gaming machine]
The pachinko machine 1 mainly includes an outer frame assembly 2, a glass frame unit 4, a tray unit 6 and a plastic frame assembly 7 (game machine frame) as its main body. Among these, the outer frame assembly 2 is a structure in which wood is combined in a vertically long rectangular shape, and the outer frame assembly 2 uses fasteners such as screws for island facilities (not shown) in the game hall. Are fixed.

  The other glass frame unit 4, tray unit 6, and plastic frame assembly 7 are attached to the island facility via the outer frame assembly 2, and these operate in an openable manner via a hinge mechanism (not shown). An opening / closing axis of a hinge mechanism (not shown) extends in the vertical direction along the left end as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1.

  A unified lock unit 9 is provided on the right edge (left edge in FIG. 2) of the plastic frame assembly 7 when viewed from the front in FIG. Correspondingly, the glass frame unit 4 and the right edge (back side) of the outer frame assembly 2 are each provided with a locking tool (not shown). As shown in FIG. 1, in a state where the glass frame unit 4 and the plastic frame assembly 7 are closed with respect to the outer frame assembly 2, the unified lock unit 9 on the back side of the glass frame unit 4 and the plastic frame assembly together with the locking device. 7 cannot be opened.

  A cylinder lock 6 a with a key hole is provided on the right edge of the tray unit 6. For example, when an administrator of a game hall inserts a dedicated key into the keyhole and twists the cylinder lock 6a clockwise, the unified lock unit 9 operates to open the glass frame unit 4 and the tray unit 6 together with the plastic frame assembly 7. It becomes a state. When these are entirely opened from the outer frame assembly 2 to the front side (moved like a door), the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed on the front side.

  On the other hand, when the cylinder lock 6a is twisted counterclockwise, only the glass frame unit 4 is unlocked while the plastic frame assembly 7 remains locked, and the glass frame unit 4 can be opened. When the glass frame unit 4 is opened to the front side, the game board 8 is exposed directly, and in this state, the manager of the game hall can remove obstacles such as ball clogging in the board surface. When the glass frame unit 4 is opened, the lock mechanism (not shown) of the tray unit 6 is exposed. If the lock mechanism is released in this state, the tray unit 6 can be opened to the front side with respect to the plastic frame assembly 7.

  The pachinko machine 1 includes a game board 8 as a game unit. The game board 8 is supported by the plastic frame assembly 7 behind (inside) the glass frame unit 4. The game board 8 can be attached to and detached from the plastic frame assembly 7 with the glass frame unit 4 opened to the front side, for example. The glass frame unit 4 has a vertically oval window 4a formed at the center thereof, and a glass unit (no reference numeral) is attached in the window 4a. The glass unit is a combination of, for example, two transparent plates (glass plates) cut in accordance with the shape of the window 4a. The glass unit is attached to the back side of the glass frame unit 4 in an openable / closable manner via a hinge mechanism (not shown). A game area 8a (board surface) is formed on the front surface of the game board 8, and the game area 8a is visible to the player from the front side through the window 4a. When the glass frame unit 4 is closed, a space in which a game ball can flow down is formed between the inner surface of the glass unit and the game board surface.

  The saucer unit 6 has a shape projecting from the outer frame assembly 2 to the front side as a whole, and an upper dish 6b is formed on the upper surface thereof. The upper plate 6b can store a game ball (rental ball) lent to a player and a game ball (prize ball) acquired by winning a prize. In the tray unit 6, a lower tray 6c is formed at the lower position of the upper tray 6b. The lower tray 6c stores game balls that are further paid out when the upper tray 6b is full. The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is a so-called CR machine (model connected to the CR unit), and the game balls borrowed by the player are separately received from the payout unit 172 on the back side separately from the prize balls. 6b or lower pan 6c).

  A lending operation unit 14 is provided on the upper surface of the tray unit 6, and a ball lending button 10 and a return button 12 are arranged on the lending operation unit 14. When a player operates the ball lending button 10 with a valuable medium (for example, a magnetic recording medium, a storage IC built-in medium, etc.) inserted in a CR unit (not shown), the number corresponding to a predetermined frequency unit (for example, 5 degrees). (For example, 125) game balls are lent out. For this reason, a frequency display unit (not shown) is arranged on the upper surface of the lending operation unit 14, and the remaining frequency of the valuable medium put in the CR unit is displayed on this frequency display unit. The player can receive the return of the valuable medium with the remaining frequency by operating the return button 12. Although the CR machine is taken as an example in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 may be a cash machine (a model not connected to the CR unit) different from the CR machine.

  In addition, an upper dish ball removal lever 6d is installed on the front surface of the tray unit 6 in front of the upper dish 6b in the upper position, and a lower dish ball removal button 6e in the center of the lower dish 6c. Is installed. The player can cause the game balls stored in the upper plate 6b to flow down to the lower plate 6c by sliding the upper plate ball removing lever 6d leftward, for example. Further, the player can, for example, push down the lower dish ball removal button 6e to drop the game balls stored in the lower dish 6c downward and discharge them. The discharged game ball is received by, for example, a ball receiving box (not shown).

  A grip unit 16 is installed at the lower right portion of the tray unit 6. The player operates the grip unit 16 to operate the launch control board set 174 and can launch (shoot) a game ball toward the game area 8a (ball launcher). The launched game ball rises along the left side edge of the game board 8, is guided by an outer band (not shown), and is thrown into the game area 8a. A large number of obstacle nails, windmills (without reference numerals in the drawing) and the like are arranged in the game area 8a, and the thrown-in game balls flow down in the game area 8a while being guided and guided by the obstacle nails and the windmill.

[Configuration of the board]
In the game area 8a, a starting gate 20, normal winning ports 22, 24, an upper starting winning port 26, a variable starting winning device 28, a variable winning device 30, and the like are installed. The game balls thrown into the game area 8a randomly pass through the start gate 20 in the process of flowing down, or the normal winning ports 22, 24, the upper starting winning port 26, and the variable starting winning device during operation. Win 28 (enter a ball). The game balls that have passed through the start gate 20 continue to flow down in the game area 8a, but the winning game balls are collected to the back side of the game board 8 through through holes formed in the game board.

  The variable start winning device 28 operates when a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a winning manner), and accordingly, the lower start winning port 28a can be awarded. (Ordinary electric appliance). The variable start winning device 28 has, for example, a pair of left and right movable pieces 28b, and these movable pieces 28b reciprocate in the left-right direction along the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. That is, as shown in the figure, the left and right movable pieces 28b are in the closed position with the tip facing upward, and at this time, winning to the lower start winning opening 28a is impossible (a state in which there is no gap through which game balls can flow). ing. On the other hand, when the variable start winning device 28 is operated, the left and right movable pieces 28b are displaced (expanded) from the closed position toward the open position, and the opening width of the lower start winning port 28a is expanded to the left and right. During this time, the variable start winning device 28 is in a state in which a game ball can flow in, and generates a win to the lower start winning port 28a. Note that the arrangement (gauge) of the obstacle nails installed on the game board 8 is basically a mode in which it is easy to guide the flow of the game balls toward the variable start winning device 28, but the game balls are always variable. The inflow does not necessarily flow into the start winning device 28, but the inflow occurs only at random.

  In addition, the above variable winning device 30 operates when a prescribed condition is satisfied (when a special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode other than non-winning), and can be awarded to a big winning opening (no reference sign). (Special electric equipment, special winning event generation means). The variable winning device 30 has, for example, one opening / closing member 30a, and this opening / closing member 30a reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. As shown in the figure, the opening / closing member 30a is in the closed position (closed state) along the board surface, and at this time, winning in the big winning opening is always impossible (the big winning opening is closed). When the variable winning device 30 is operated, the opening / closing member 30a is displaced so as to fall forward with its lower end edge as a hinge, thereby opening the large winning opening (open state). During this time, the variable winning device 30 is in a state in which the inflow of game balls is not impossible, and can generate an event of winning a prize winning opening. At this time, the opening / closing member 30a also functions as a member for guiding the inflow of the game ball to the special winning opening.

  In addition, an out port 32 is formed in the game area 8 a, and game balls that have not won a prize are finally collected through the out port 32 to the back side of the game board 8. In addition, all game balls that have been driven into the game area 8 a including the game balls won in the upper start winning opening 26, the variable start winning device 28, and the variable winning device 30 are collected to the back side of the game board 8. The collected game balls are discharged out of the frame from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 through an out passage assembly (not shown), and further join a supply path of an island facility (not shown).

  The game board 8 is provided with a normal symbol display device 33 and a normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, for example, at the lower right position in the window 4a, as well as a first special symbol display device 34, a second special symbol display device 35, A first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, a second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a, and a game state display device 38 are provided (normal symbol display means, special symbol display means, lottery element storage means). Among these, the normal symbol display device 33, for example, turns on two lamps (LEDs) alternately to display the normal symbols variably, and stops and displays the normal symbols when the lamps are turned on or off. The normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a displays 0 to 4 memory numbers depending on, for example, a combination of turning off, lighting, or blinking of two lamps (LEDs).

  FIG. 3 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the game board 8 (lower right position in the window 4a). The first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 can display the variation state and stop state of the special symbol by, for example, 7 segment LEDs (with dots), respectively (symbol display means).

  Further, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a and the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a have 0 to 4 each, for example, depending on a display mode constituted by a combination of extinction or lighting and blinking of two lamps (LEDs). Is stored (memory number display means). For example, in a display mode in which both lamps are turned off, 0 stored number is displayed, in a display mode in which one lamp is turned on, 1 stored number is displayed, and in a display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. In the display mode in which two stored numbers are displayed, and in addition to blinking one lamp, the other lamp is lit, three stored numbers are displayed, and in the display mode in which the two lamps are flashed together, the stored number is four. For example, the individual is displayed.

  The first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is changed to the display mode after being incremented one by one in the sense of memorizing that a winning is generated each time a game ball flows into the upper start winning opening 26. (Up to a maximum of four), every time the change of the special symbol is started with the winning, the display mode is changed by one by one. Further, the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is displayed after being incremented by one in the sense of memorizing that a winning occurs every time a game ball flows into the variable starting winning device 28 (lower starting winning port). It changes to the mode (up to 4), and each time the change of the special symbol is started with the winning as a trigger, it changes to the display mode after decreasing by one. In the present embodiment, when the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), the first special symbol is already in the upper start winning opening 26 in a state where the first special symbol can start to change (when stopped). Even if a game ball flows in, the display mode does not change. In addition, when the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), the variable start winning device 28 (lower start winning port) in a state where the second special symbol can already start to change (when stopped). Even if a game ball flows in, the display mode does not change. That is, the number of memories (maximum 4) represented by the display mode of each special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, 35a is the number of winnings that have not yet started to change in the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Represents.

  The game state display device 38 includes, for example, three LEDs corresponding to a jackpot type display lamp 38a, a probability variation state display lamp 38c, and a short time state display lamp 38d, respectively. The jackpot type display lamp 38b is unused (blank). However, when a jackpot having a number other than 16 rounds (for example, a jackpot of 6 rounds) is mounted, the jackpot type display lamp 38b is used. In the present embodiment, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol display device 34, the second special symbol display device 35, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, and the second special symbol operation described above. The memory lamp 35a and the game state display device 38 are attached to the game board 8 in a state where they are mounted on one integrated display board 89.

[Other configuration of the game board: see FIG. 1]
The game board 8 is provided with a production unit 40 from the center position to the right side. The effect unit 40 has an upper edge portion 40a that functions as a guide member that changes the flow direction of the game ball, and includes various decorative parts 40b and 40c on the inner side. The decorative parts 40b and 40c can enhance the decorativeness of the game board 8 by the three-dimensional modeling, and can perform a dramatic operation by emitting transmitted light using, for example, a built-in light emitter (LED or the like).

  In addition, a dot matrix LED display 42 (image display) is installed inside the effect unit 40. The dot matrix LED display 42 includes various effect images including effect symbols corresponding to special symbols. Is displayed. The dot matrix LED display 42 is configured, for example, by arranging dot light emitting portions by multicolor LEDs (or full color LEDs) (not shown) in a matrix, and each dot light emitting portion emits light by a multicolor LED (not shown). To display pictures and characters for production. As described above, the game board 8 impresses the player with the characteristics of the pachinko machine 1 based on the configuration of the board surface (design of a cell plate (not shown)) and the decoration of the effect unit 40.

  A ball guide passage 40d is formed at the left edge of the effect unit 40, and a rolling stage 40e is formed at the lower edge thereof. The ball guide passage 40d is opened obliquely upward to the left in the game area 8a. When a game ball flowing down in the game area 8a randomly flows into the ball guide path 40d, it passes through the inside and rolls. Released onto the stage 40e. The upper surface of the rolling stage 40e has a smooth curved surface. Here, the game ball can roll in the left-right direction. The game ball that has rolled on the rolling stage 40e will eventually flow into the lower game area 8a. A ball discharge path 40f is formed at the center of the rolling stage 40e. At this time, the game ball that has flowed down from the rolling stage 40e to the ball discharge path 40f easily flows into the upper start winning opening 26 directly below the ball discharge path 40f. Become.

  In addition, a drive source (for example, a motor, a solenoid, etc.) is attached to the lower part of the effect unit 40 together with the four movable accessories 60a to 60d for effect. In the present embodiment, the four movable accessories 60a to 60d are, for example, ornaments imitating weapons. In order from the left, an accessory 60a imitating a sword, an accessory 60b imitating a shield, and an accessory imitating a wand. 60c, an accessory 60d simulating an ax is arranged side by side. Further, an accessory lamp 57 is provided near the center of each movable accessory 60a to 60d, and its lighting state (lighting color, lighting pattern) can be changed. In addition to the effect using the image by the dot matrix LED display 42, the effect movable accessories 60a to 60d and the effect lamp 57 can execute an effect accompanied by the operation of a tangible object. Due to the effects using the movable accessories 60a to 60d and the accessory lamp 57, appealing power different from the effects using the two-dimensional image can be exhibited. A production example using the movable accessory 60d will be described later.

  Further, a memory display lamp 59 is arranged between the dot matrix LED display 42 and the movable combination 60a to 60d. The memory display lamp 59 is composed of eight lamps. Of these, the four lamps on the left correspond to the number of memories of the first special symbol, and the four lamps on the right correspond to the number of memories of the second special symbol. ing. For example, when the stored number of lottery elements of the first special symbol is “0”, none of the lamps is lit. In addition, when the number of stored lottery elements of the first special symbol is “1”, the leftmost lamp is lit, and when the number of stored lottery elements of the first special symbol is “4”, the leftmost lamp is 4 from the left. All the lamps up to are turned on.

[Configuration of the front of the frame]
In the glass frame unit 4, glass frame top lamps 46 and 48 and glass frame side lamps 50 are installed at a plurality of locations so as to surround the glass unit 8 as components for production. In addition, a tray lamp 52 is installed in the tray unit 6, and the tray lamp 52, the glass frame top lamps 46 and 48, and the glass frame side lamp 50 are integrally connected on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 in appearance. Designed as if it were.

  The various lamps 46 to 52 described above perform effects by, for example, light emission (lighting and blinking, change in luminance gradation, change in color tone, and the like) of built-in LEDs. In addition, a pair of left and right glass frame speakers 54 and a glass frame middle speaker 55 are built in the upper part of the glass frame unit 4, and a saucer speaker 56 is provided on the right side of the lower plate 6 c in the saucer unit 6. Built in. These speakers 54, 55, and 56 output sound effects, BGM, voice, etc. (sound in general) and execute effects.

  In the center of the tray unit 6, an effect switching button 45 (operation input receiving means) is installed at a position in front of the upper tray 6b. The player operates the effect switching button 45 to switch the contents of the effect, for example, during the change of the symbol, during the decisive display of the jackpot, or during the jackpot game (various notice effects, probability change promotion effects, role An object movement effect, etc.) can be generated.

[Configuration on the back side]
As shown in FIG. 2, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, there are a power supply control unit 162, a main control board unit 170, a dispensing device unit 172, a flow path unit 173, a launch control board set 174, and a dispensing control board unit 176. A back cover unit 178 and the like are installed. In addition, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, various electronic devices (including a control computer not shown) constituting the power supply system and control system of the pachinko machine 1, an external terminal board 160, a power cord (power plug) 164, A ground wire (ground terminal) 166, connection wiring (not shown), and the like are installed. The electronic devices will be further described later based on another block diagram (FIG. 4).

  The payout device unit 172 has, for example, a prize ball tank 172a and a prize ball case (no reference sign), and the prize ball tank 172a is installed on the upper edge (back side) of the plastic frame assembly 7. In this state, game balls replenished from a replenishment route (not shown) can be stored. The game balls stored in the prize ball tank 172a are guided to a prize ball case through an upper prize ball basket (not shown). The flow path unit 173 guides the game ball sent out from the payout unit 172 toward the tray unit 6 on the front side.

  The external terminal board 160 is an interface for connecting the pachinko machine 1 to an external electronic device (for example, a data display device, a hall computer, etc.). From the external terminal board 160, the game progress of the pachinko machine 1 is achieved. Various external information signals (for example, award ball information, door opening information, symbol determination number information, jackpot information, start opening information, etc.) indicating the state and maintenance state are output to an external electronic device. Yes.

  The power cord 164 secures a power source (electric power) necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 1 by being connected to, for example, a power source device (for example, AC 24V) installed in an island facility of a game arcade. The ground wire 166 is also connected to a ground terminal installed in the island facility to secure the ground (ground) of the pachinko machine 1.

[Control configuration]
Next, a configuration related to control of the pachinko machine 1 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing various electronic devices equipped in the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 includes a main control device 70 (main control computer) that serves as the center of the control operation. The main control device 70 mainly has a function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. Yes. The main controller 70 is built in the main control board unit 170 described above.

  The main controller 70 is equipped with a circuit board (main control board) on which a main control CPU 72 as a central processing unit is mounted. The main control CPU 72 includes a ROM 74 and a RAM (RWM) together with a CPU core and registers (not shown). ) This is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as 76 are integrated. The main controller 70 is equipped with a random number generator 75 and a sampling circuit 77. Among these, the random number generator 75 generates a hardware random number (for example, 0 to 65535 in decimal notation) for determining the big hit, and the generated random number is input to the main control CPU 72 through the sampling circuit 77. The In addition, the main controller 70 is equipped with peripheral ICs such as an input / output (I / O) port 79, a clock generation circuit (not shown), a counter / timer circuit (CTC), etc., and these are circuited together with the main control CPU 72. It is mounted on the board. A signal transmission path, a power supply path, a control bus, and the like are formed as wiring patterns on the circuit board (or the inner layer portion).

  The start gate 20 described above is integrally provided with a gate switch 78 for detecting the passage of a game ball. The game board 8 is provided with an upper start winning port switch 80, a lower start winning port switch 82, and a count switch 84 corresponding to the upper start winning port 26, the variable start winning device 28, and the variable winning device 30, respectively. . Each start winning port switch 80, 82 is for detecting the winning of a game ball to the upper start winning port 26 and the variable start winning device 28 (lower start winning port 28a). The count switch 84 is for detecting the winning of a game ball to the variable winning device 30 (large winning opening) and counting the number. Similarly, the game board 8 is equipped with a winning opening switch 86 for detecting the winning of a game ball to the normal winning openings 22 and 24. Here, a configuration using a common winning opening switch 86 for all the normal winning openings 22 and 24 is given as an example, but for example, separate winning opening switches 86 are installed on the left and right sides of the board, and the left winning opening switch is provided. In 86, a winning of a game ball for the normal winning ports 22, 24 located on the left side of the board surface is detected, and in the right winning port switch 86, a winning of a game ball in the normal winning port 24 located on the right side of the board surface is detected. Also good.

  In any case, the winning detection signals of these switches 78 to 86 are input to the main control CPU 72 via an input / output driver (not shown). Due to the configuration of the game board 8, in this embodiment, the winning detection signals from the gate switch 78, the count switch 84, and the winning opening switch 86 are transmitted via the panel relay terminal plate 87, and are sent to the panel relay terminal plate 87. , Wiring patterns and connection terminals for relaying the respective winning detection signals are provided.

  The above-mentioned normal symbol display device 33, normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a and game The state display device 38 is controlled in display operation based on a control signal from the main control CPU 72. The main control CPU 72 outputs control signals for the display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, 35a according to the progress of the game, and controls the lighting state of each LED. The display devices 33, 34, 35, and 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, and 35a are installed on the game board 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89 as described above. A control signal is transmitted from the main control CPU 72 to the substrate 89 via the panel relay terminal board 87.

  Further, the game board 8 is provided with a normal electric accessory solenoid 88 and a big prize opening solenoid 90 corresponding to the variable start winning device 28 and the variable winning device 30, respectively. These solenoids 88 and 90 are operated (excited) based on a control signal from the main control CPU 72 to open and close (activate) the variable start winning device 28 and the variable winning device 30 respectively. The solenoids 88 and 90 also transmit control signals from the main control CPU 72 through the panel relay terminal plate 87 described above.

  In addition, a glass frame opening switch 91 is installed in the glass frame unit 4, and a plastic frame opening switch 93 is installed in the plastic frame assembly 7. When the glass frame unit 4 is opened alone, a contact signal from the glass frame opening switch 91 is input to the main controller 70 (main control CPU 72), and when the plastic frame assembly 7 is opened from the outer frame assembly 2. The contact point signal from the plastic frame opening switch 93 is input to the main controller 70 (main control CPU 72). The main control CPU 72 can detect the open state of the glass frame unit 4 and the plastic frame assembly 7 from these contact signals. When the main control CPU 72 detects the open state of the glass frame unit 4 or the plastic frame assembly 7, the main control CPU 72 generates a door opening information signal as the external information signal.

  On the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a payout control device 92 is equipped (special privilege grant means). The payout control device 92 (payout control computer) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 described above. The payout control device 92 is equipped with a circuit board (payout control board) on which a payout control CPU 94 is mounted. The payout control CPU 94 is also an LSI in which a semiconductor memory such as a ROM 96 and a RAM 98 is integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). It is configured. The payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 based on the prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and executes the payout operation of the requested number of game balls. The main control CPU 72 generates a prize ball information signal as the external information signal together with the prize ball instruction command.

  In a prize ball case (not shown) of the payout device unit 172, a payout device substrate 100 is installed together with a payout motor 102 (for example, a stepping motor). The payout device substrate 100 is provided with a drive circuit for the payout motor 102. Yes. The payout device substrate 100 specifically controls the rotation angle of the payout motor 102 based on the payout number instruction signal from the payout control device 92 (the payout control CPU 94), and pays out the designated number of game balls from the prize ball case. Let it come out. The paid-out game balls are sent to the tray unit 6 through the payout flow path in the flow path unit 173.

  Further, for example, a payout path ball cut switch 104 is installed at an upstream position of the prize ball case, and a payout counting switch 106 is installed at a downstream position of the payout motor 102. When a prize ball is actually paid out by driving the payout motor 102, a count signal from the payout count switch 106 is input to the payout device substrate 100 each time. Further, when a ball break occurs at an upstream position of the prize ball case, a contact signal from the payout path ball break switch 104 is input to the payout device substrate 100. The dispensing device substrate 100 transmits the input count signal and contact signal to the dispensing control device 92 (dispensing control CPU 94). The payout control CPU 94 can detect the actual payout number and the out-of-ball state based on the signal received from the payout device substrate 100.

  Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a full switch 161, for example, inside the lower plate 6c (the position of the bowl as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). The prize balls (game balls) that are actually paid out are discharged to the upper plate 6b through the flow path unit 173. When the upper plate 6b is full of game balls, As described above, it flows into the lower plate 6c. When the lower tray 6c is filled with game balls, the full tank switch 161 is turned ON, and a full tank detection signal is input to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). In response to this, even if the payout control CPU 94 receives a prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, it temporarily suspends further prize ball operations, and stores the unpaid prize ball remaining number in the RAM 98. Note that the RAM 98 can be backed up even when the power is cut off, so that even if a power failure (including momentary power failure) occurs during the game, the information on the number of remaining unsold prize balls will not be lost. .

  On the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a firing solenoid 110 is installed together with the firing control board 108. In addition, a ball feeding solenoid 111 is provided in the tray unit 6. The launch control board 108, the launch solenoid 110, and the ball feed solenoid 111 constitute the launch control board set 174 described above, and the launch control board 108 is provided with drive circuits for the launch solenoid 110 and the ball feed solenoid 111. ing. Among these, the ball feed solenoid 111 performs an operation of sending out the game balls stored in the tray unit 6 one by one to a predetermined launch position in the launcher case. Moreover, the launch solenoid 110 hits the game ball sent to the launch position, and performs the operation of firing game balls one by one continuously (intermittently) toward the game area 8 as described above. The game ball is emitted at intervals of, for example, about 0.6 seconds (within 100 per minute).

  On the other hand, the grip unit 16 located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a firing lever volume 112, a touch sensor 114, and a firing stop switch 116. Among these, the firing lever volume 112 generates an analog signal proportional to the operation amount (so-called stroke) of the firing handle by the player. The touch sensor 114 detects that the player's body is touching the grip unit 16 (launching handle) from the change in capacitance, and outputs a detection signal. The firing stop switch 116 generates a firing stop signal (contact signal) in accordance with the player's operation.

  The above receiving tray unit 6 is provided with a launch relay terminal plate 118, and each signal from the launch lever volume 112, the touch sensor 114, and the launch stop switch 116 is sent via the launch relay terminal plate 118. Sent to. The drive signal from the launch control board 108 is applied to the ball feed solenoid 111 via the launch relay terminal board 118. When the player operates the firing handle, an analog signal (which may be an encoded digital signal) is generated by the firing lever volume 112 according to the operation amount, and the firing solenoid 110 is driven based on the signal at this time. Thereby, the strength of launching a game ball is adjusted according to the operation amount of the player. The drive circuit of the firing control board 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110 when the detection signal from the touch sensor 114 is off (low level) or when the firing stop signal is input from the firing stop switch 116. . In addition to this, the launch relay terminal plate 118 is connected with a lending device connection terminal plate 120 such as a game ball, and when the above-mentioned CR unit is not connected to this lending device connection terminal plate 120 such as a game ball, the launch is similarly performed. The drive circuit of the control board 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110.

  The tray unit 6 includes a frequency display board 122 and a rental / return switch board 123. Of these, the frequency display board 122 is provided with the display of the frequency display unit (7-segment LED for 3 digits). The lending / return switch board 123 has switch modules connected to the ball lending button 10 and the return button 12, respectively. When the ball lending button 10 or the return button 12 is operated, the operation signal is lended and It is transmitted from the return switch board 123 to the CR unit via the game ball rental device connecting terminal board 120. Further, a frequency signal indicating the remaining frequency of the valuable medium is transmitted from the CR unit to the frequency display board 122 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 120. A display circuit (not shown) on the frequency display board 122 drives the display unit based on the frequency signal, and displays the remaining frequency of the valuable medium as a numerical value. If no valuable medium is inserted in the CR unit or the remaining frequency of the inserted valuable medium becomes zero, the display circuit of the frequency display board 122 drives the display device to display a demonstration (of the valuable medium). (Display for prompting input) can also be performed.

  Further, the pachinko machine 1 includes an effect control device 124 (effect control computer) as a control configuration. The effect control device 124 controls the effect accompanying the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. The effect control device 124 is also equipped with a circuit board (composite sub-control board) on which an effect control CPU 126 that is a central processing unit is mounted. The effect control CPU 126 includes a CPU core (not shown) and a semiconductor memory such as a ROM 128 and a RAM 130 as a main memory. The production control device 124 is provided at a position covered by the back cover unit 178 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

  The effect control device 124 is equipped with an input / output driver (not shown) and various peripheral ICs, as well as a lamp driving circuit 132 and an acoustic driving circuit 134. The production control CPU 126 performs production control based on the production command transmitted from the main control CPU 72, and gives commands to the lamp driving circuit 132 and the acoustic driving circuit 134 to emit various lamps 46 to 52 and the panel lamp 53. Or a process of actually outputting sound effects, voices, and the like from the speakers 54, 55, and 56.

  The effect control device 124 and the main control device 70 are connected to each other via, for example, a communication harness (not shown). However, the communication between these is performed only in one direction from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and communication in the reverse direction is not performed. Note that the communication harness may adopt a parallel format according to the bus width of various commands transmitted from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, or each driver IC (I / O). A serial format may be adopted according to the hardware configuration.

  The lamp driving circuit 132 includes a switching element such as a PWM (pulse width modulation) IC or a MOSFET (not shown). The lamp driving circuit 132 switches driving voltages (or duty switching) applied to various lamps including LEDs. ) And manage the operation such as light emission and flashing. In addition to the glass frame top lamps 46 and 48, the glass frame side lamp 50, and the saucer lamp 52, the various lamps include a decoration / production board lamp 53 installed in the game board 8. The panel lamp 53 corresponds to an LED incorporated in the above-described effect unit, or an LED incorporated in the variable start winning device 28, the variable winning device 30, or the like. Here, although the example in which the saucer lamp 52 is connected to the glass frame decorating board 136 is given, a saucer illuminated board is installed in the saucer unit 6, and the saucer lamp 52 is interposed via the saucer illuminated board. It may be configured to be connected to the lamp driving circuit 132.

  The acoustic drive circuit 134 is, for example, a sound generator that includes a sound ROM, an acoustic control IC, an amplifier, and the like (not shown). The acoustic drive circuit 134 drives the upper speaker 54 and the lower speaker 56 to perform acoustic output.

  In the present embodiment, a glass frame decoration board 136 is installed on the inner surface of the glass frame unit 4, and drive signals from the lamp drive circuit 132 and the acoustic drive circuit 134 pass through the glass frame decoration board 136 and various lamps 46. To 52 and speakers 54, 55, and 56. Further, the effect switching button 45 is connected to the glass frame decorating board 136, and when the player operates the effect switching button 45, the contact signal is input to the effect control device 124 through the glass frame decorating board 136. Is done. In addition, although the example which connected the production | presentation switch button 45 to the glass-frame decoration board 136 is given here, when installing said saucer illumination board, the production switch button 45 is connected to the saucer illumination board. Also good.

  In addition, a panel board 138 is installed on the game board 8, and an accessory lamp 57, an accessory motor 58, and a memory display lamp 59 are connected to the panel board 138 in addition to the panel lamp 53. Yes. The accessory motor 58 drives the movable accessories 60a to 60d via, for example, a link mechanism or a gear mechanism (not shown). Each movable accessory 60a-60d is moved up and down by the accessory motor 58, vibrated left and right, or rotated laterally. The lighting control signal and the drive control signal from the lamp driving circuit 132 are applied to the panel lamp 53, the accessory lamp 57, the accessory motor 58, and the memory display lamp 59 via the panel illumination board 138, respectively.

  The dot matrix LED display 42 is installed on the back side of the game board 8, and the display screen is visible through a substantially rectangular opening formed in the game board 8. In addition, an effect display control device 144 is installed on the back side of the game board 8, and the display operation by the dot matrix LED display 42 is controlled by the effect display control device 144. The effect display control device 144 is equipped with a display control CPU 146 that is a general-purpose central processing unit and a circuit board (effect display control board) on which a VDP 152 that is a display processor is mounted. Among these, the display control CPU 146 is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as a ROM 148 and a RAM 150 are integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). The VDP 152 is configured as an LSI in which a semiconductor core such as an image ROM 154 and a VRAM 156 is integrated with a processor core (not shown). The VRAM 156 can use a part of the storage area as a frame buffer.

  The ROM 128 of the effect control CPU 126 stores a basic program related to effect control, and the effect control CPU 126 executes effect control according to this program. The production control includes the production control using the various lamps 46 to 53 and the speakers 54, 55, and 56 as described above, and the production control by the image display using the dot matrix LED display 42. included. The effect control CPU 126 transmits basic information (for example, effect number) related to the effect to the display control CPU 146, and the display control CPU 146 that receives the information transmits a specific effect image based on the basic information. Control the display.

  The display control CPU 146 outputs a more detailed control signal to the VDP 152. Receiving this, the VDP 152 accesses the image ROM 154 based on the control signal, reads necessary image data therefrom, and transfers it to the VRAM 156. Furthermore, the VDP 152 expands the image data in the frame buffer for each frame (still image per unit time) on the VRAM 156, and individually drives each pixel of the dot matrix LED display 42 based on the buffered image data. To do.

  In addition, a power supply control unit 162 (power supply control means) is provided on the back side of the plastic frame assembly 7. The power supply control unit 162 has a built-in switching power supply circuit. When external power (for example, AC 24V) is taken from the island facility through the power cord 164, necessary power (for example, DC + 34V, + 12V) can be generated therefrom. The electric power generated by the power supply control unit 162 is distributed to the main control device 70, the payout control device 92, and the effect control device 124. Furthermore, power is supplied to the launch control board 108 via the payout control device 92, and power is supplied to the CR unit via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 120. The low voltage power for logic (for example, DC + 5V) is generated by a power supply IC (3-terminal regulator or the like) built in each device. Further, as described above, the power supply control unit 164 is grounded (grounded) to the island facility through the ground wire 166.

  The external terminal plate 160 is connected to the payout control device 92, and various external information signals generated by the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) pass through the payout control device 92 to the external terminal plate 160. Is output to the outside. The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) and the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) can output an external information signal to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the external terminal board 160. The signals output from the external terminal board 160 are collected by, for example, a hall computer (not shown) in a game hall. Here, the configuration via the payout control device 92 is taken as an example, but a configuration in which an external information signal is directly output from the main control device 70 to the external terminal board 160 may be used.

  The above is a configuration example relating to the control of the pachinko machine 1. Next, control processing executed by the main control CPU 72 of the main control device 70 will be described.

[Reset start (main) processing]
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control CPU 72 starts a reset start process. The reset start process restores the gaming state based on the backup information saved at the previous power shutdown (so-called power recovery) or conversely clears the backup information, thereby adjusting the initial state of the pachinko machine 1 Process. The reset start process is positioned as a main process (main control program) for guaranteeing a stable gaming operation of the pachinko machine 1 after adjusting the initial state.

  5 and 6 are flowcharts showing a procedure example of the reset start process. Hereinafter, the process performed by the main control CPU 72 will be described step by step.

  Step S101: First, the main control CPU 72 sets the top address of the stack area in the stack pointer.

  Step S102: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 sets the vector-type interrupt mode (mode 2) and corrects the default RST-type interrupt mode (mode 0). Thus, thereafter, the main control CPU 72 can refer to an arbitrary address (however, the least significant bit is 0) as an interrupt vector and execute a designated interrupt handler.

  Step S103: The main control CPU 72 executes a standby process at reset. This process is for securing a certain standby time (for example, about several thousand ms) at the time of reset start (for example, power-on) and checking the main power-off detection signal during that time. Specifically, when the main control CPU 72 sets the loop counter for the waiting time, the main control CPU 72 bit-checks the input port of the main power-off detection signal while decrementing the value of the loop counter. The main power-off detection signal is input from, for example, a power monitoring IC that is a peripheral device. If the input of the main power-off detection signal is confirmed before the loop counter reaches 0, the main control CPU 72 restarts the process from the beginning. As a result, for example, the system can be protected when a main power switch (not shown) is turned on and off repeatedly within a short time (about 1 to 2 seconds).

  Step S104: Next, the main control CPU 72 permits access to the work area of the RAM 76. Specifically, the RAM protect setting value in the work area is reset (00H). As a result, thereafter, access to the work area of the RAM 76 is permitted.

  Step S105: Also, the main control CPU 72 performs initial setting of a mask register in order to set an interrupt mask. Specifically, a value for enabling the CTC interrupt is stored in the mask register.

  Step S106: The main control CPU 72 refers to the input signal from the previously cleared RAM clear switch and confirms whether or not the RAM clear switch has been operated (switch ON). If the RAM clear switch is not operated (No), step S107 is executed next.

  Step S107: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not backup information is stored in the RAM 76, that is, whether or not a backup validity determination flag is set. If the backup is normally completed in the previous power-off process and the backup validity determination flag (for example, “A55AH”) is set (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S108.

  Step S108: The main control CPU 72 executes a sum check on the backup information in the RAM 76. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sum-checks all areas of the work area of the RAM 76 (a user work area including a use-prohibited area and a stack area) except the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer. If the result of the sum check is normal (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S109.

Step S109: The main control CPU 72 resets the backup validity determination flag (for example, “0000H”).
Step S110: The main control CPU 72 clears the command waiting for transmission immediately before the occurrence of the previous power interruption.

  Step S111: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an effect control return process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 instructs the effect control device 124 to return a command (for example, a model designation command, a special symbol probability state designation command, a special figure destination determination effect command, an effect command when the working memory number is increased, and the action memory number. (Decrease effect command, count counter remaining command, special game state designation command, etc.). In response to this, the effect control device 124 performs the effect state (for example, the internal probability state, the effect symbol display mode, the operation memory count effect display mode, the sound output content, and the various lamps being executed at the time of the previous power shutdown. Light emission state, etc.) can be restored.

  Step S112: The main control CPU 72 executes state return processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets various values in the work area of the RAM 76 based on the backup information, and the gaming state (for example, the display state of special symbols, the internal probability state, The operation memory contents, various flag states, random number update states, etc.) are restored. The main control CPU 72 restores the backed up PC register value.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is operated at power-on (step S106: Yes), when the backup validity determination flag is not set (step S107: No), or when the backup information is not normal. (Step S108: No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to Step S113.

Step S113: The main control CPU 72 clears the stored contents other than the use prohibited area of the RAM 76. As a result, the work area and stack area of the RAM 76 are all initialized, and even if valid backup information is stored, the contents are erased.
Step S114: The main control CPU 72 performs initial setting of the RAM 76.

  Step S115: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs a command (command necessary for effect control) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 after the initial setting.

  Step S116: The main control CPU 72 executes a payout control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs an instruction command for starting the payout of prize balls to the payout control device 92.

  Step S117: The main control CPU 72 executes CTC initial setting processing, and performs initial setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) that is a peripheral device. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an interrupt vector register and sets an interrupt count value (for example, 4 ms) in the CTC. As a result, when a CTC interrupt occurs next time, the main control CPU 72 can continue the processing from the program address of the PC register that has been backed up.

  When the above procedure is executed in the reset start process, the main control CPU 72 shifts to the main loop shown in FIG. 6 (connection symbol A → A).

  Step S118, Step S119: The main control CPU 72 executes the power interruption occurrence check process after prohibiting interruption. In this process, the main control CPU 72 performs bit check on the input port of the main power-off detection signal and monitors the occurrence of power-off (decrease in drive voltage). When the power is cut off, the main control CPU 72 clears the output port buffer corresponding to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the big prize opening solenoid 90, etc., and the entire area excluding the backup validity judgment flag and the sum check buffer in the work area of the RAM 76. Is backed up, and the sum result value is stored in the sum check buffer. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the valid value (for example, “A55AH”) in the backup validity determination flag area, prohibits access to the RAM 76, and stops (NOP) the process. On the other hand, if the power shutoff does not occur, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S120. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU executes the process at the time of the occurrence of power interruption as a non-maskable interrupt (NMI) process.

  Step S120: The main control CPU 72 executes an initial value update random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 increments random numbers for updating (changing) initial values of various software random numbers. In this embodiment, various random numbers (for example, hit determination random numbers corresponding to ordinary symbols, jackpot symbol random numbers, reach determination random numbers, variation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) other than jackpot determination random numbers (hardware random numbers) are generated on the program. ing. These software random numbers are updated by a loop counter within a predetermined range by another interrupt process (step S201 in FIG. 8). In this process, the initial value of the loop counter (all The random number of may not be the target). The initial value updating random number is used to randomly change the initial value, and in step S120, the initial value updating random number is updated. Note that the reason why step S120 is executed after the interruption is prohibited in step S118 is that the same process is executed in another interrupt management process (step S202 in FIG. 8), and therefore overlap (conflict) ) To prevent the above). As described above, in this embodiment, the big hit determination random number is a hardware random number generated by the random number generator 75, and its update cycle is faster (eg, several μs) than the timer interrupt cycle (eg, several ms). Therefore, it is not necessary to update the initial value of the jackpot determination random number.

  Step S121, Step S122: The main control CPU 72 permits the interrupt and executes other random number update processing. The random numbers updated by this processing are random numbers (reach determination random numbers, variation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) that are not related to the determination of the winning type (winning type) among software random numbers. This process is performed in the remaining time when a timer interrupt occurs during execution of the main loop and the main control CPU 72 executes another interrupt management process (FIG. 8). The contents of the interrupt management process will be described later.

[Power failure check processing]
FIG. 7 is a flowchart specifically illustrating a procedure example of the power-off occurrence check process.
Step S130: First, the main control CPU 72 sets a condition for checking the occurrence of power interruption. This check condition can be set as an on-counter value for confirming that the main power-off detection signal is continuously output, for example.

  Step S132: Next, the main control CPU 72 reads the main power-off detection switch input port and confirms whether or not the main power-off detection signal is output (checks a specific bit). Although not particularly illustrated, the main power-off detection switch is mounted on the main controller 70, for example, and this main power-off detection switch monitors the drive voltage supplied from the power control unit 162, and the voltage level is monitored. When the voltage falls below the reference voltage, the main power-off detection signal is output. Note that the main power-off detection switch may be built in the power control unit 162. When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the main power-off detection signal is not output at this time (No), the main control CPU 72 exits this process and returns to the reset start process. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the main power-off detection signal is output (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S134.

  Step S134: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the above check conditions are satisfied. Specifically, for example, 1 is subtracted from the on-counter value set in the previous step S130, and it is confirmed whether or not the result is 0. If the on-counter value is not yet 0 at this time (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to step S132 and reconfirms the main power-off detection switch input port. When the check condition is satisfied by repeating the loop from step S134 to step S132 (step S134: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S136.

  Step S136: The main control CPU 72 clears the output port buffer corresponding to the test signal terminal and the command control signal in addition to the output port corresponding to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88 and the big prize opening solenoid 90 as described above.

Step S138, Step S140: Next, the main control CPU 72 adds the entire contents excluding the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer in the work area of the RAM 76 in units of 1 byte, and repeats until the addition is completed for all areas. .
Step S142: When the calculation of the sum is completed for all the areas (Step S140: Yes), the main control CPU 72 stores the sum result value in the sum check buffer.

Step S144: Next, the main control CPU 72 stores the valid value in the backup validity determination flag area as described above.
Step S146: The main control CPU 72 stores “01H” indicating access prohibition in the protect value of the RAM 76, and prohibits access to the work area (including the use prohibition area and the stack area) of the RAM 76.
Step S148: Then, the main control CPU 72 enters a standby loop and stops all other processes in preparation for shutting off the main power supply. After the main power is cut off, the backup power is supplied from a backup power circuit (not shown) (for example, a circuit including a capacitive element mounted on the main controller 70), so the stored contents of the RAM 76 are lost even after the main power is turned off. Held without. The backup power supply circuit may be incorporated in the power supply control unit 162, for example.

  Through the above processing, all the information stored in the work area of the RAM 76 to be backed up (sum added) is retained in the RAM 76 even after the main power is turned off. The stored memory is restored as backup information when the power is turned off after confirming the normality of the checksum in the previous reset start process (FIG. 5).

[Interrupt management processing (timer interrupt processing)]
Next, interrupt management processing (timer interrupt processing) will be described. FIG. 8 is a flowchart illustrating an exemplary procedure of interrupt management processing. The main control CPU 72 executes an interrupt management process every predetermined time (for example, several ms) based on the interrupt request signal from the counter / timer circuit. Each procedure will be described below.

  Step S200: First, the main control CPU 72 saves the values of the registers (accumulator A, flag register F, and general-purpose registers B to L) used during execution of the main loop in the save area of the RAM 76. Another value can be written in the registers (A to L) after the value is saved in the interrupt management process.

  Step S201: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a lottery random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 updates the value of the counter for generating various random numbers for lottery. The value of each counter is incremented in the counter area of the RAM 76 and loops within a specified range. The various random numbers include, for example, jackpot symbol random numbers, normal symbol random numbers determined, and the like.

  Step S202: The main control CPU 72 executes the initial value update random number update process also here. The content of the process is the same as described above.

  Step S203: The main control CPU 72 executes input processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 inputs various switch signals from an input / output (I / O) port 79. Specifically, an input state (ON / OFF) of a passage detection signal from the gate switch 78 and a winning detection signal from the upper starting winning port switch 80, the lower starting winning port switch 82, the count switch 84, and the winning port switch 86. Lead.

  Step S204: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes switch input event processing. In this process, among the switch signals input in the previous input process, the determination of an event occurring during the game is made based on the winning detection signals from the gate switch 78, the upper start winning opening switch 80, and the lower starting winning opening switch 82. Depending on the event that occurred, further processing is executed. The specific contents of the switch input event process will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  In this embodiment, when a winning detection signal (ON) is input from the upper start winning opening switch 80 or the lower starting winning opening switch 82, the main control CPU 72 performs internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, respectively. It is determined that an event that triggers the event (lottery opportunity) has occurred. When the passage detection signal (ON) is input from the gate switch 78, the main control CPU 72 determines that an event serving as a lottery trigger corresponding to the normal symbol has occurred. If it is determined that any event has occurred, the main control CPU 72 executes a process corresponding to each event. The processing executed when a winning detection signal is input from the upper start winning port switch 80 or the lower starting winning port switch 82 will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S205, Step S206: The main control CPU 72 executes a special symbol game process and a normal symbol game process during the interrupt management process. These processes are for specifically proceeding with the game in the pachinko machine 1. Of these, in the special symbol game process (step S205), the main control CPU 72 controls the execution of the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol described above, or the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 34. (2) The variable display and stop display by the special symbol display device 35 are controlled, and the operation of the variable winning device 30 is controlled according to the display result. Details of the special symbol game process will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  In the normal symbol game process (step S206), the main control CPU 72 controls the variable display and stop display by the normal symbol display device 33 described above, and controls the operation of the variable start winning device 28 according to the display result. To do. For example, the main control CPU 72 stores a random number (ordinary random number per symbol) acquired in response to the passage of the start gate 20 in the previous switch input event processing (step S204). The random number value is read out from the memory, and it is determined whether or not it falls within a predetermined hit range (operation lottery execution means). When the random number value falls within the hit range, the normal symbol display device 33 displays the normal symbol in a variable manner, and after stopping the normal symbol in a predetermined hit state, the main control CPU 72 switches the normal electric accessory solenoid 88 on. Excitingly activates the variable start winning device 28 (movable piece actuating means). On the other hand, if the random number value is out of the hit range, the main control CPU 72 performs a normal symbol stop display in a manner of deviation after the variable display.

  Step S207: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes prize ball payout processing. In this process, based on the winning detection signals input from the various switches 80, 82, 84, 86 in the previous input process (step S203), a prize ball instruction command for instructing the payout control device 92 the number of prize balls is issued. Output.

  Step S208: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes external information processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sends the above-mentioned external information signals (for example, prize ball information, door opening information, symbol determination number information, jackpot information, start port information, etc.) to the hall computer of the game hall through the external terminal board 160. Store in port output request buffer.

  In the present embodiment, among various external information signals, for example, “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” are output to the outside as jackpot information, so that an external electronic device (data display device) connected to the pachinko machine 1 is output. Can provide various jackpot information (external information signal output means). In other words, the jackpot information is divided into a plurality of “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” and output, so that the type of jackpot (winning type) from these combinations can be tabulated and managed by a hall computer (not shown) or internal Recognize changes in the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) or shortened state of symbol variation time, or generate a small hit (a hit where the condition device does not work) that is not classified as a “big hit” even if it is not winning Can be aggregated and managed. Based on the jackpot information, for example, a data display device (not shown) counts and displays the number of jackpot occurrences within the past several business days for each pachinko machine 1, and recognizes whether or not each jackpot is currently jackpot. Or for each table, it can be recognized whether or not the current symbol variation time is in a shortened state. In this external information processing, the main control CPU 72 controls each output state (set of ON or OFF) of “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” in detail.

  Step S209: The main control CPU 72 executes test signal processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates various test signals representing its internal state (for example, normal symbol game management state, special symbol game management state, jackpot, probability variation function in operation, time reduction function in operation). These are stored in the port output request buffer. With this test signal, for example, the internal state of the main control CPU 72 can be tested outside the main controller 70.

  Step S210: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes display output management processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 performs the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol display device 34, the second special symbol display device 35, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, and the second special symbol. The lighting state of the operation memory lamp 35a, the game state display device 38, etc. is controlled. Specifically, the drive signal stored in the port output request buffer is output to the port in the previous special symbol game process (step S205) or the normal symbol game process (step S206). The drive signal is stored in the port output request buffer as byte data to be applied to each LED. As a result, each LED is driven in a predetermined display mode (a mode of performing symbol variation display, stop display, working memory number display, game state display, etc.).

  Step S211: The main control CPU 72 executes output management processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs the external information signal (byte data) stored in the port output request buffer in the previous external information processing (step S208). Further, the main control CPU 72 outputs the drive signals, test signals, and the like of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88 and the special prize opening solenoid 90 stored in the port output request buffer together.

  Step S212: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect control output process. In this processing, it is confirmed whether or not there is a command (command necessary for presentation control) that the main control CPU 72 should transmit to the presentation control device 124 in the command buffer. Output port.

  Step S213: The main control CPU 72 clears the port output request buffer stored by the current CTC interrupt.

  In the present embodiment, an example is given in which the processing (game control program module) of steps S205 to S212 is executed as a timer interrupt processing. However, these processings are executed by being incorporated in the main loop of the CPU. There is also a programming example.

  Step S214: When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 stores a value (01H) for designating the end of interrupt in the interrupt program counter, and ends the CTC interrupt.

  Step S215, Step S216: Then, the main control CPU 72 restores the saved values of the registers (A to L) and permits the next CTC interrupt. Thereafter, the main control CPU 72 returns to the main loop (program address indicated by the stack pointer).

[Switch input event processing]
FIG. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the switch input event process (step S204 in FIG. 8). Each procedure will be described below.

  Step S10: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input from the upper start winning opening switch 80 corresponding to the first special symbol (the first event is generated). When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S12 and executes the first special symbol memory update process. Specific processing contents will be further described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, when no winning detection signal is input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S14.

  Step S14: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input (second event occurs) from the lower start winning port switch 82 corresponding to the second special symbol. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S16 and executes the second special symbol memory update process. Here again, the details of the specific processing will be further described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, if there is no input of a winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S18.

  Step S18: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input from the count switch 84 corresponding to the big winning opening. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S20 and executes a large winning mouth count process. In the big winning opening counting process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the variable winning device 30 every round during the big hit game. On the other hand, if no winning detection signal is input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S22.

  Step S22: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not a passage detection signal is input from the gate switch 78 corresponding to the normal symbol. When the input of the passage detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S24 and executes the normal symbol memory update process. In the normal symbol memory update process, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current number of normal symbol working memories is less than the upper limit number (for example, 4), and if it does not reach the upper limit number, obtains a random number per normal symbol To do. Further, the main control CPU 72 increments the normal symbol operating memory number by one. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the acquired random value per normal symbol in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. On the other hand, when no winning detection signal is input (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the interrupt management process (FIG. 8).

[First special symbol memory update process]
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the first special symbol memory update process (step S12 in FIG. 9). Hereinafter, the procedure of the first special symbol memory update process will be described in order.

  Step S30: First, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the first special symbol working memory number counter to check whether or not the working memory number is less than the maximum value (for example, 4). The working memory number counter represents the number (the number of sets) of big hit determination random numbers and big hit symbol random numbers stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. That is, the random number storage area of the RAM 76 is divided into four sections (for example, 2 bytes each) for each symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), and each section contains a big hit decision random number and a big hit symbol random number. Each can be stored as a set. At this time, if the value of the working memory number counter corresponding to the first special symbol has reached the maximum value (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 9). On the other hand, if the value of the working memory number counter is less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S31.

  Step S31: The main control CPU 72 adds one first special symbol working memory number. The first special symbol operation memory number counter is stored, for example, in the operation memory number area of the RAM 76, and the main control CPU 72 increments (+1) the value. Based on the counter value added here, the lighting state of the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is controlled by the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 8).

  Step S31a: The main control CPU 72 obtains a probability state determination random value corresponding to the first special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77. The random value is acquired by specifying the pin address of the random number generator 75. In the case where the main control CPU 72 performs 8-bit processing, the address designation is performed twice for each upper byte and lower byte. When the main control CPU 72 reads the probability state determination random value from the designated address, the main control CPU 72 saves it at the transfer destination address as the probability state determination random value corresponding to the first special symbol.

  Step S32: The main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of first lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). The acquisition of the random number value is also performed by designating the address of the jackpot symbol random number counter area. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot determination random number value from the designated address, the main control CPU 72 saves it at the transfer destination address as a jackpot determination random number corresponding to the first special symbol.

  Step S33: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76. The acquisition of the random number value is also performed by designating the address of the jackpot symbol random number counter area. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot symbol random number value from the designated address, the main control CPU 72 saves it at the transfer destination address as a jackpot symbol random number corresponding to the first special symbol.

  Step S34: Further, the main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires a reach determination random number and a variation pattern determination random number from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 as random number values related to the variation condition of the first special symbol. Similarly, these random number values are acquired by designating the address of the random number counter area for variation. When the main control CPU 72 acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number from the designated address, it saves them in the transfer destination address.

  Step S35: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved probability state determination random number, jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number and variation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the first special symbol, and these random numbers are transferred. A set is stored in empty sections in the area (lottery element storage means). The order (for example, first to fourth) is set in the plurality of sections. If all the first to fourth sections are empty at this stage, the random numbers are stored in order from the first section. Alternatively, if the first section is already filled and the other second to fourth sections are empty, the random numbers are stored in order from the second section. Note that the random number storage area is read out in a FIFO (First In First Out) format.

  Step S36: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current game management state (internal state) is in operation of the time reduction function or whether it is a big hit. If the time reduction function is not in operation other than the big hit (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S37 and S38. If the time reduction function is in operation or is a big hit (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S37 and S38 and proceeds to step S38a. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that the pre-reading effect is not performed during the big hit. Also, except during the big hit, when both the working memory of the first special symbol and the working memory of the second special symbol remain, the variation of the second special symbol is prioritized over the first special symbol (the second special symbol of the second special symbol) This is because the variable start winning device 28 is operated at a high frequency particularly during the operation of the time shortening function. In addition, while the time shortening function is activated, the special symbol variation time is shortened, and the normal symbol winning probability is high (for example, low probability is about 25/251 → about 249/251), and In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened (for example, about 10 seconds when not in operation → about 1 second) and the opening time of the variable start winning device 28 is extended (for example, about 0.3 seconds when not in operation → 2 .5 seconds), and the number of times of release increases (for example, increases from 1 to 2 when not in operation), so that the game ball can be fired for a long time (all memory of normal symbols is interrupted and variable) As long as the change of the second special symbol is prioritized, the operation memory is less likely to be interrupted (so-called electric chew support) unless the start winning device 28 is interrupted for a period of time until the operation is stopped. However, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be determined (fluctuated) in the order in which the prizes are generated, without providing a priority order. Note that step S36 may be divided into two steps, for example, step S36a for determining “time reduction function in operation” and step S36b for determining “big hit”.

  Step S37: When the time shortening function is not activated (step S36: No), the main control CPU 72 executes an effect determination process at the time of acquisition for the first special symbol. This process determines the result of the internal lottery in advance (before the start of fluctuation) based on the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot symbol random number of the first special symbol respectively acquired in the previous steps S32 to S34, and thereby the production contents This is for determination (so-called “look ahead”). The specific processing contents will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S38: After returning from the at-acquisition effect determination process, the main control CPU 72 next sets the upper bytes (for example, “B8H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command for the first special symbol. This high-order byte data describes that the command type is “for special figure destination determination effect relating to the first special symbol”. Since the lower byte of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous acquisition effect determination process (step S37), the upper byte is combined with the lower byte, for example. Will be generated.

  Step S38a: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command at the time of increasing the number of working memories regarding the first special symbol. Specifically, for the preceding value (for example, “BBH”) of the upper byte representing the type of command, a 1-word length in which the increased number of working memories (for example, “01H” to “04H”) is added to the lower byte. A production command is generated. At this time, for the lower byte, the second place is set to “0” by default to indicate that the value is “result (change information) due to increase in number of working memories”. That is, if the lower byte is “01H”, it indicates that the current working memory number has become “01H” as a result of increasing by one from the previous working memory number “00H”. Similarly, if the lower byte is “02H” to “04H”, it is increased by one from the previous working memory numbers “01H” to “03H”, so that the current working memory number is “02H” to “02H”. 04H ". The preceding value “BBH” is a value indicating that the current effect command is the working memory number command for the first special symbol.

  Step S39: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect command output setting process for the first special symbol. This process is for transmitting the special figure destination determination effect command generated in the previous step S38, the effect command for increasing the number of working memories generated in step S38a, and the start opening winning tone control command to the effect control device 124. (Memory number notification means).

  When the above procedure is completed or the first special symbol operation memory number has reached 4 (step S30: No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 9).

[Second special symbol memory update process]
Next, FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the second special symbol memory update process (step S16 in FIG. 9). Hereinafter, the procedure of the second special symbol memory update process will be described in order.

  Step S40: The main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter to check whether or not the working memory number is less than the maximum value. Similarly to the above, the second special symbol actuated memory number counter represents the number (number of sets) of jackpot determination random numbers and jackpot symbol random numbers stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. At this time, if the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter reaches the maximum value (for example, 4) (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 9). On the other hand, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter is still less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S41 and thereafter.

  Step S41: The main control CPU 72 increments the second special symbol working memory number by one (increments the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter). Similarly to the previous step S31 (FIG. 10), the lighting state of the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is controlled in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 8) based on the counter value added here. Will be.

  Step S41a: The main control CPU 72 acquires a probability state determination random value corresponding to the second special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77. The method for acquiring the random value is the same as that in step S31a (FIG. 10) described above.

  Step S42: The main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of second lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). The method for acquiring the random value is the same as that in step S32 (FIG. 10) described above.

  Step S43: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76. The method for acquiring the random value is the same as that in step S33 (FIG. 10) described above.

  Step S44: The main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires a reach determination random number and a variation pattern determination random number regarding the variation condition of the second special symbol from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76. The acquisition of these random values is also performed in the same manner as step S34 (FIG. 10) described above.

  Step S45: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved probability state determination random number, jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number and variation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the second special symbol, and these random numbers are transferred. A set is stored in empty sections in the area (lottery element storage means). The storage method is the same as step S35 (FIG. 10) described above.

  Step S45a: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current game management state (internal state) is a big hit. If it is not a big hit (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S46 and S47. Conversely, if it is a big hit (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S46 and S47 and proceeds to step S48. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that the pre-reading effect is not performed during the big hit.

  Step S46: When it is other than big hit (step S45a: No), next, the main control CPU 72 executes an effect determination process at the time of acquisition for the second special symbol. This process determines the result of the internal lottery in advance (before the start of the change) based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number of the second special symbol obtained in the previous steps S42 to S44, respectively, It is for judging. Here, it is determined only in the previous step S45a whether or not the big hit is made, and the operating state of the time reduction function is not determined. As described above, in the present embodiment, in the game other than the big hit, the first special In order to change the second special symbol over the symbol, the result of the internal lottery is determined in advance for the second special symbol, regardless of the operating state of the time reduction function, except during the big hit, and the result is pre-readed. This is because it can be used. The specific processing contents will be described later.

  Step S47: After returning from the effect determination process at the time of acquisition, the main control CPU 72 sets the upper byte (for example, “B9H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command. This high-order byte data describes that the command type is “for special figure destination determination effect relating to the second special symbol”. Similarly, since the lower byte of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous effect determination processing at the time of acquisition (step S46), for example, one word is synthesized by combining the upper byte with the lower byte. A long command will be generated.

  Step S48: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command for increasing the number of working memories with respect to the second special symbol. Here, a one-word-length production command in which the increased number of working memories (for example, “01H” to “04H”) is added to the lower byte with respect to the preceding value (for example, “BCH”) representing the command type. Is generated. Similarly, for the second special symbol, the second place of the lower byte is set to “0” by default to indicate that the value is “a result of an increase in the number of working memories (change information)”. it can. The preceding value “BCH” is a value indicating that the current effect command is an operating memory number command for the second special symbol.

  Step S49: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect command output setting process for the second special symbol. As a result, preparation for transmitting a special figure destination determination effect command, an effect command when increasing the number of operating memories, a start opening winning sound control command, and the like regarding the second special symbol to the effect control device 124 is performed (memory number notifying means). . When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 9).

[Acquisition process during acquisition]
FIG. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of the effect determination process at the time of acquisition. The main control CPU 72 executes this acquisition effect determination process in the first special symbol memory update process and the second special symbol memory update process (step S37 in FIG. 10 and step S46 in FIG. 11) (predetermined determination). Execution means). As described above, this process is executed for each of the first special symbol (when winning the upper start winning opening 26) and the second special symbol (when winning the variable start winning device 28). Therefore, the following description may correspond to a process related to the first special symbol and a process related to the second special symbol. Hereinafter, the contents of the processing will be described along each procedure.

  Step S50: The main control CPU 72 sets the lower byte (for example, “00H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command (point determination information). The byte data set here represents the standard value of the command (at the time of loss).

  Step S52: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot determination random number as the first determination random value. The random numbers to be loaded here are those stored in the RAM 76 in the first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 10) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 11). .

  Step S54: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the loaded random number is outside the range of the winning value (here, the lower limit value or less). Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a comparison value (lower limit value) in the A register, and subtracts the loaded random number value from this comparison value. The comparison value (lower limit value) is defined in advance according to the winning probability of the internal lottery in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the calculation result is 0 or a positive value from the value of the flag register, for example. As a result, if the loaded random number is outside the range of the winning value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S80.

  Step S80: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a deviation pattern information pre-determination process (first determination unit). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates the variation pattern destination determination command described above for the variation time at the time of disconnection. In the variation pattern destination determination command generated here, prior determination information regarding the variation time (or variation pattern number) particularly when the “time reduction function” is activated is reflected. For example, if the current state is when the “time reduction function” is activated, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the “out-of-reach fluctuation fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)” based on the loaded reach determination random number. Judge whether there is. As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to “outlier reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)”, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to “short-time / non-shortening fluctuation time”. In the case of reach variation, it is also possible to determine a “reach group (type of reach)” from the reach mode random number and generate a variation pattern destination determination command from the result. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to the “outlier reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)”, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the “short / mid-shortening fluctuation time”. Alternatively, if the current state is when the “time reduction function” is inactive (low probability state), the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the “normally out of reach reach fluctuation” based on the loaded reach determination random number. It is determined whether or not. As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to “normally deviation reach fluctuation”, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to “normally deviation reach fluctuation time”. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to “normally deviation reach fluctuation”, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to “normal deviation fluctuation time”. Further, the variation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49) as described above. In this process, the main control CPU 72 may generate a change pattern destination determination command for the change pattern at the time of small hit, similarly to the above-described process at the time of loss.

  When the above procedure is executed, the main control CPU 72 ends the acquisition-time effect determination process, and returns to the caller's first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 10) or the second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 11). On the other hand, if it is determined in the previous step S54 that the loaded random number is not outside the range of the winning value but within the range (step S54: No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S56.

  Step S56: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is set. The probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is set when there is a winning value among the jackpot determination random numbers stored so far, although the fluctuation has not yet started. Specifically, if there is a winning value in the jackpot decision random number stored so far, if the jackpot symbol random number paired with this corresponds to “probability variation”, for example, the probability state schedule flag “A0H” is set. This value represents a flag value for setting as a schedule that a high probability state is to be set in advance determination (prefetching determination) of the jackpot determined random number acquired after the jackpot determined random number. On the other hand, if there is a winning value in the jackpot decision random number stored so far, and the jackpot symbol random number paired with this corresponds to "non-probable (normal) symbol", the probability state For example, “01H” is set in the schedule flag. This value represents a flag value for setting as a schedule that a normal (low) probability state is set in advance determination (prefetching determination) of the big hit determination random number acquired after this big hit determination random number. If the winning value does not exist in the big hit determination random numbers stored so far, the flag value is reset (00H). The value of the probability state schedule flag is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76, for example. Here, an example is given in which the advance hit determination is strictly performed using the “probability state schedule flag”. However, when the advance hit determination is simply performed based on the current probability state, step S56 and the subsequent steps are performed. Step S58, step S60, step S62, step S76, etc. may be omitted.

  If the probability state schedule flag has not yet been set (step S56: No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S66.

  Step S66: In this case, the main control CPU 72 sets the comparison value for the next low probability (normal time) in the A register. The comparative value for low probability is also defined in advance according to the winning probability at the low probability in the pachinko machine 1.

  Step S68: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the “current probability state flag”. This probability state flag indicates whether or not the current internal state has a high probability (probably changing), and is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76. If the current probability state is a high probability (probably changing), the value “01H” is set as the state flag, and if the current probability state is low (normally), the value of the state flag is reset (“00H”). ").

  Step S70: Then, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the loaded current special symbol probability state flag does not represent a high probability (≠ 01H), and if the result indicates a high probability (No). Next, step S64 is executed.

  Step S64: The main control CPU 72 sets a comparative value for high probability. As a result, the low-probability comparison value set in the previous step S66 is rewritten. The high probability comparison value is defined in advance according to the winning probability at the high probability in the pachinko machine 1.

  As described above, when the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is not yet set and the current internal state is high probability, the comparison value is rewritten for high probability and the next step S72 is performed. Will be executed. On the other hand, when it is confirmed in the previous step S70 that the current probability state flag does not represent a high probability (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips step S64 and executes the next step S72.

  Step S72: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the random number loaded in the previous step S52 is outside the range of the winning value. That is, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the jackpot determination random number value from the comparison value set for each state. Similarly, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the calculation result is a negative value (<0) from the value of the flag register, and if the result is that the loaded random number is outside the range of the winning value (Yes). The main control CPU 72 executes the above-described deviation pattern information prior determination process (step S80). On the other hand, if the loaded random number is not outside the range of the winning value but is within the range (No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S74.

  Step S74: The main control CPU 72 executes a probability state type determination process. This process is for determining the probability state after the end of the big hit game based on the probability state determined random number paired with the big hit determined random number. For example, the main control CPU 72 uses the probability state determination random number for each symbol stored in the first special symbol memory update process (step S31a in FIG. 10) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S41a in FIG. 11). When loaded, the calculation using the comparison value is executed in the same manner as in the above step S54, and it is determined from the result whether the probability state after the big hit game is “high probability state” or “low probability state” To do. The main control CPU 72 stores the determination result at this time as a probability state destination determination value, and proceeds to the next step S76.

  Step S76: The main control CPU 72 sets the value of the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result. Specifically, when the probability state destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 represents the “low probability state”, the main control CPU 72 sets the value “01H” in the probability state schedule flag. On the other hand, when the probability state destination determination value represents the “high probability state”, the main control CPU 72 sets the value “A0H” in the probability state schedule flag. As a result, in the subsequent processing, it is determined that “flag set has been completed” in step S56.

  Step S78: The main control CPU 72 sets the probability state destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 as the lower byte of the special figure destination determination effect command. As the probability state destination determination value, for example, “01H” is set when it corresponds to the “low probability state”, and “A0H” is set when it corresponds to the “high probability state”. In any case, by setting the lower byte data here, the standard lower byte data “00H” set in the previous step S50 is rewritten.

  Step S79: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a big hit hour variation pattern information pre-determination process (first determination unit). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates the above-described variation pattern destination determination command for the variation time at the big hit. In the variation pattern destination determination command generated here, for example, prior determination information related to the reach variation time (or variation pattern number) at the time of big hit is reflected. Further, the variation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49) as described above.

  The above is the procedure before the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is set (before the internal first hit). On the other hand, when the probability state schedule flag is set through the previous step S76, the following procedure is executed. However, when the previous hit determination is performed only with the current probability state as described above, it is not necessary to execute the following step S56, step S58, step S60, step S62, and step S76.

  Step S56: When the main control CPU 72 confirms that a value has already been set in the probability state schedule flag (Yes), it next executes step S58.

  Step S58: The main control CPU 72 first sets a low probability (normal time) comparison value in the A register.

  Step S60: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads a “probability state schedule flag”. The probability state schedule flag is for setting a probability state in a subsequent determination based on the immediately preceding determination result as described above, and is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76. . If the probability state based on the immediately preceding destination determination result is scheduled to shift to a high probability (probability change), “A0H” is set as the value of the probability state schedule flag as described above. If the probability state based on is scheduled to return to a low probability (normal), “01H” is set as the value of the probability state schedule flag.

  Step S62: Then, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded probability state schedule flag does not represent a high-probability schedule (≠ 01H), and if the result indicates a high-probability schedule (No Then, step S64 is executed to set a comparative value for high probability.

  As described above, when the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is already set and the value is a high probability, the next step S72 and subsequent steps after rewriting the comparison value for the high probability. Will be executed. On the other hand, when it is confirmed in the previous step S62 that the probability state schedule flag does not represent a schedule with a high probability but a schedule with a normal (low) probability (Yes), the main control CPU 72 performs a step. S64 is skipped and the subsequent step S72 and subsequent steps are executed. Thus, in the present embodiment, it is possible to make a prior jackpot determination in consideration of subsequent changes in internal state (normal probability state → high probability state, high probability state → normal probability state) based on the previous determination result. .

  When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 10) or the second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 11).

[Special design game processing]
Next, the details of the special symbol game process executed in the interrupt management process (FIG. 8) will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the special symbol game process. The special symbol game process includes an execution selection process (step S1000), a special symbol change pre-process (step S2000), a special symbol change process (step S3000), a special symbol stop display process (step S4000), and a variable winning device management process. This is a configuration including a subroutine (program module) group of (Step S5000). First, the basic flow of the special symbol game process will be described along each process.

  Step S1000: In the execution selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S2000 to S5000) from the “jump table”. For example, the main control CPU 72 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the special symbol game process as the return destination address in the stack pointer.

  Which process is selected as the next jump destination differs depending on the progress of the process performed so far (special symbol game management status). For example, if the special symbol has not yet started changing display (special symbol game management status: 00H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol variation pre-processing (step S2000) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the special symbol variation pre-processing has already been completed (special symbol game management status: 01H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol variation processing (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and the special symbol variation is in progress. If the process has been completed (special symbol game management status: 02H), the special symbol stop displaying process (step S4000) is selected as the next jump destination. In this embodiment, the jump destination address is specified by the “jump table” and the process is selected. However, apart from such a selection method, a “process flag”, a “process selection flag”, or the like is used. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU selects a process to be executed next. In such a programming example, the CPU CALLs each process in a single way, and at the top step, the conditional branch (continuation / return) is performed with reference to the flag one by one. There is no need for the CPU 72 to call each process one by one.

  Step S2000: In the special symbol variation pre-processing, the main control CPU 72 performs an operation to prepare conditions for starting the variation display of the special symbol. The specific processing content will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S3000: In the special symbol variation processing, the main control CPU 72 performs drive control of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 while counting the variation timer. Specifically, an ON or OFF drive signal (1 byte data) is output for each segment and dot (0th to 7th) of the 7-segment LED. The pattern of the drive signal changes with the passage of time, whereby a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

  Step S4000: In the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 controls the drive of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Similarly, an ON or OFF drive signal is output for each segment and dot of the 7-segment LED. However, the pattern of the drive signal is constant, whereby a special symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Step S5000: The variable winning device management process is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the winning mode (a mode other than non-winning) in the previous special symbol stop display process. For example, when a special symbol is stopped and displayed in a 16-round big hit mode, an opportunity to shift from a normal state until then to a big hit gaming state (a special gaming state advantageous to the player) occurs. During the big hit game, the jump destination is set in the variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the special symbol variation display is not performed. In the variable winning device management process, the large winning opening solenoid 90 is energized for a predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds or until nine winnings are counted) for a predetermined number of continuous operations (for example, 16 times), and thereby variable. The winning device 30 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern (continuous operation of the special electric accessory). In the meantime, by allowing the variable winning device 30 to win the game balls intensively, the player is given an opportunity to collect a lot of prize balls (special game execution means). Note that the opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 30 at the time of the big win is referred to as “round”, and if the total number of continuous operations is 16 times, these may be collectively referred to as “16 rounds”. In the present embodiment, 16 round big hits are provided as types of big wins, and for the 16 round big hits, a plurality of winning types (winning symbols) are provided therein.

  Further, when the main control CPU 72 sets the large winning opening opening pattern (number of rounds, number of opening / closing operations per round, opening time, etc.) in the variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 performs the opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 30 for one round. Each time it is finished, the value of the round number counter is incremented by one. The value of the round number counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76 with an initial value of 0, for example. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a round number command representing the value of the round number counter. The round number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 8). When the value of the round number counter reaches the set number of continuous operations, the main control CPU 72 ends the big hit game (big player) only for that round.

  When the big hit game ends, the main control CPU 72 changes the state after the big hit game (high probability state, time reduction state) based on the game state flag (probability variation function operation flag, time reduction function operation flag). In the “high probability state”, the probability variation function is activated, and the winning probability in the internal lottery becomes, for example, about ten times higher than usual (specific game state transition means, high probability state transition means, high probability state setting means). In the “time reduction state”, the time reduction function is activated, and the normal symbol operation lottery has a high probability as described above, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened, and the opening time of the variable start winning device 28 is extended. As a result, the number of times of opening increases (so-called electric Chu support is performed). Note that the “high probability state” and the “time reduction state” may be transferred to only one of them in terms of control, or may be transferred in accordance with both of them.

[Multiple winning types]
In the present embodiment, for the above “16 round jackpot”, for example, (1) “16 round jackpot 1”, (2) “16 round jackpot 2”, (3) “16 round jackpot 3” are selected as a plurality of winning types. Provided (may be more).

  The winning type corresponds to the type of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is stopped and displayed at the time of winning. For example, “16 round jackpot 1” corresponds to the jackpot of “16 round symbol 1”, and “16 round jackpot 2” corresponds to the jackpot of “16 round symbol 2”. Also, “16 round big hit 3” corresponds to big hit of “16 round symbol 3”. Therefore, hereinafter, the “winning type” will be appropriately referred to as “winning symbol”.

[16 round designs]
First, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in any of the “16 round symbol 1” to “16 round symbol 3” in the special symbol stop display processing, the normal state until then is changed to the big hit gaming state. An opportunity to shift occurs (special game execution means). In this case, the special winning opening is opened once each over a sufficiently long time (for example, a maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds) from the first round, and this continues until the 16th round. For this reason, the “16-round normal symbol” jackpot game gives 16 rounds of award (prize balls) to the player. Note that when a predetermined number of times (for example, 9 times = 9 game balls) is generated within one round, the special winning opening is closed without waiting for the longest opening time to elapse.

[Lottery by probability variation]
Moreover, in this embodiment, the probability-dependent lottery is adopted. Here, the “probability-specific lottery” is a mechanism for drawing a probability state to be transferred after that, separately from the special symbol winning symbol lottery. By using this probability-variable lottery system, so-called “Seg-Bare” (the contents of the jackpot will be revealed by checking the 7-segment LED of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35). There is an advantage that can be suppressed. For example, even if a segment of “E” is displayed on a 7-segment LED and a big hit is made, the probability state after the big hit game cannot be determined only by the information.

  Therefore, if the probability state designation value is set to “01H” in step S2409a included in the special symbol fluctuation pre-processing (step S2000) regardless of which winning symbol is matched, the internal game after the big hit game ends. A privilege for shifting the state to the “high probability state” is given to the player. On the other hand, if the probability state designation value is set to “00H” in step S2409a included in the special symbol variation pre-processing (step S2000), the internal state returns to the normal probability state (low probability state) after the big hit game ends. To do.

[Small hits]
In the present embodiment, small wins are provided as winning types other than non-winning. When winning a small winning game, a small winning game is performed separately from the big winning game, and the variable winning device 30 is opened and closed. That is, if the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the small hit state in the previous special symbol stop display processing, the game (variable winning a prize) in the normal probability state or the high probability state. A game in which the device 30 operates) is executed. In such a small win game, the variable winning device 30 opens and closes a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), but hardly wins a big winning opening. In addition, even if the small hit game ends, the “probability change function” does not operate, and the “time reduction function” does not operate, so it goes to the “high probability state” or “time reduction state”. The privilege to be transferred is not granted (it is not a prerequisite for that). Also, even if you win a small hit in the “high probability state”, the “high probability state” will not end after the game of that small hit, and even if you win a small hit in the “time reduction state” The “time reduction state” does not end after the end of the small hit game (except when the upper limit is reached). In the present embodiment, the game specification for setting a small hit is used, but it may be a game specification for not setting a small hit.

[Special symbol change pre-treatment]
FIG. 14 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the special symbol variation pre-processing. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S2100: First, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the first special symbol working memory number or the second special symbol working memory number remains (greater than 0). This confirmation can be made with reference to the value of the working memory number counter stored in the RAM 76. When the number of working memories of both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 executes a demonstration setting process in step S2500.

  Step S2500: In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a demonstration effect command. The demonstration effect command is output to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 8). When the demo setting process is executed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. When returning, it returns to the end address as described above (and so on).

  On the other hand, if the value of the working memory number counter of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is greater than 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2200.

  Step S2200: The main control CPU 72 executes a special symbol storage area shift process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 preferentially reads out the lottery random numbers (big hit determination random number, big hit symbol random number) stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76, which corresponds to the second special symbol. At this time, if random numbers are stored in two or more sections, the main control CPU 72 reads and erases (consumes) the random numbers in order from the first section, and then moves (shifts) the remaining random numbers one by one to the previous section. ) The read random number is stored, for example, in another temporary storage area. When the random number corresponding to the second special symbol is not stored, the main control CPU 72 reads the random number corresponding to the first special symbol and stores it in the temporary storage area. Each random number stored in the temporary storage area is used for internal lottery in the next jackpot determination process. As a result, in the present embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially performed over the first special symbol. In addition, the program which reads a random number in the order memorize | stored simply may be sufficient, without providing the priority order according to such special symbols. Further, in this process, the main control CPU 72 subtracts one value of the working memory number counter (the one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol which has been subjected to the random number shift) stored in the RAM 76, and after the subtraction Is set to “Number of working memories at start of change”. Thereby, the display mode of the number stored by the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a or the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a changes (decreases by 1) in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 8). . When the procedure so far is finished, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2300.

  Step S2300: The main control CPU 72 executes a big hit determination process (internal lottery). In this process, the main control CPU 72 first sets a range of the big hit value and determines whether or not the read random number value is included in this range (internal lottery execution means). The range of the jackpot value set at this time is different between the normal probability state and the high probability state (when the probability variation function is activated). In the high probability state, the range of the jackpot value is expanded to about 10 times that of the normal probability state. The If the random value read at this time is included in the range of the big hit value, the main control CPU 72 sets the big hit flag (01H), and then proceeds to step S2400.

  When the above big hit flag is not set, the main control CPU 72 sets the range of the small hit value next in the same big hit determination process, and determines whether or not the read random number value is included in this range (lottery execution). means). The “small hit” here is other than non-winning (out of), but is different from “big hit”. That is, “big hit” generates an opportunity (game milestone) to shift to the above “high probability state” or “time reduction state”, but “small hit” does not generate such an opportunity. However, “small hit” is positioned as satisfying the condition for operating the variable winning device 30 as in the case of “big hit”. The range of the small hit value set at this time may be different between the normal probability state and the high probability state (when the probability variation function is activated), or may be the same. In any case, if the read random number value is included in the range of the small hit value, the main control CPU 72 sets the small hit flag, and then proceeds to step S2400. As described above, in the present embodiment, as the hit range corresponding to other than the non-winning, the range of the big hit value and the small hit value is defined in advance in the program. Each of them may be written in the ROM 74, read out, and the big hit determination may be performed while comparing with the random value.

  Step S2400: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (01H) is set for the big hit flag in the previous big hit determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the jackpot flag (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2402.

  Step S2402: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (01H) is set in the small hit flag in the previous big hit determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the small hit flag (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2404. The main control CPU 72 may determine the big hit (for example, 01H is set) or the small hit (for example, 0AH is set) according to the value of the common hit flag without separately preparing the big hit flag and the small hit flag.

  Step S2404: The main control CPU 72 executes an off-time stop symbol determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets stop symbol number data at the time of disconnection by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of loss) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. These commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 8).

  In this embodiment, since the 7-segment LED is used for the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35, for example, the display mode of the stop symbol at the time of disconnection is always set to one segment (the central bar). It is possible to fix the stop symbol number data to one value (for example, 64H) by keeping only the “−”) lighting display. In this case, the storage capacity used in the program can be reduced, the processing load on the main control CPU 72 can be reduced, and the processing speed can be improved.

  Step S2405: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a deviation variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the fluctuation pattern number at the time of deviation for the special symbol (fluctuation pattern selection means). The variation pattern number is used to distinguish the variation display type (pattern) of the special symbol or to correspond to the variation time required for the variation display. Since the fluctuation time at the time of loss differs depending on whether or not it is the above “time reduction state”, in this process, the main control CPU 72 loads the gaming state flag and the current state is “time reduction state”. Check if it exists. In the “time reduction state”, except for the case where reach fluctuation is basically performed, the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection is set to a shortened time (for example, about 2.0 seconds) (shortening fluctuation time determination means) ). Even if not in the “time shortening state”, the fluctuation time at the time of losing is shortened based on, for example, “the number of operating memories at the start of fluctuation display (0 to 3)” set in step S2200, except when the reach fluctuation is performed. (For example, the number of working memories at the start of variable display 0 to about 12.5 seconds, the number of working memories at the start of variable display 1 to about 8 seconds, the number of operating memories at the start of variable display 2 to 5 seconds The number of working memories at the start of variable display is 3 → about 2.0 seconds). Note that the symbol stop display time at the time of disconnection is constant (for example, about 0.5 seconds) regardless of the variation pattern. The main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined fluctuation time (at the time of disconnection) in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time at the time of disconnection in the stop symbol display timer.

  In the present embodiment, when the result of the internal lottery is a non-winning result, for example, a “reach effect” is generated and the control is performed so that the “reach effect” is not generated. It is said. The “variation pattern selection table at the time of loss” preliminarily defines variation patterns corresponding to a plurality of types of effects such as “non-reach effect” and “reach effect”. One of the fluctuation patterns is selected from the inside. The reach production includes various reach production such as normal reach production, long reach production, battle reach production, and the like.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of modes corresponding to the gaming state are prepared, and the content of the variation pattern selected according to the staying mode is different. The following is an overview of the various modes.

(1) Normal mode The special symbol lottery is in a low probability state, and the normal symbol lottery is also in a low probability state (a state without electric Chu support). When a player starts playing with the pachinko machine 1, the game proceeds from the normal mode.
(2) Search mode A special symbol lottery is in a low probability state or a high probability state, and a normal symbol lottery is in a low probability state (a state without electric support). The search mode in the low probability state is the low probability search mode, and the search mode in the high probability state is the high probability search mode.

(3) Crown mode It is a high probability state for the special symbol lottery, but it is a low probability state (a state without electric support) for the normal symbol lottery.
(4) Chance mode The special symbol lottery is in a low probability state or a high probability state, and the normal symbol lottery is in a high probability state (a state with electric Chu support). The chance mode in the low probability state is a low probability chance mode, and the chance mode in the high probability state is a high probability chance mode.

(5) Rush mode A high probability state with respect to a special symbol lottery, and a high probability state with respect to a normal symbol lottery (a state with electric Chu support).

  These various modes are modes managed by the main control CPU 72, and the main control CPU 72 determines a variation pattern according to the stay mode. Confirmation of the current stay mode can be realized by confirming the main control mode status. Here, the “main control mode status” is a variable that holds identification numbers corresponding to various modes, and the value is set after the end of the big hit game. Updated. A unique identification number is assigned to each mode, and the main control CPU 72 can confirm the current stay mode by referring to the value of the main control mode status.

[Example of variation pattern selection table for loss]
FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation pattern selection table (normal mode / search mode) at the time of loss.
This selection table is a table that is used when the normal mode or the search mode is off (when it corresponds to non-winning) (fluctuation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “1” to “8” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  Fluctuation pattern numbers “1” to “5” correspond to fluctuation patterns that are out of reach without performing a reach effect, and fluctuation pattern numbers “6” to “8” are fluctuation patterns that are out of reach after reaching. It corresponds. Note that such a variation pattern selection table is also used in the prior determination process of the acquisition effect determination process (FIG. 12) (the same applies to the big hit). The variation pattern selection table may have different table contents depending on the number of operation memories at the start of variation.

  Here, the length of the set fluctuation time is greatly different between the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern. That is, the “non-reach variation pattern” basically corresponds to a short variation time (for example, about 3.0 seconds to 12.0 seconds depending on the number of working memories), whereas the “reach variation pattern” This corresponds to a long fluctuation time (for example, about 30 seconds to 150 seconds) more than twice as long.

  Then, the main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, The corresponding variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determining means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “2” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation pattern selection table (crown mode) at the time of loss.
This selection table is a table used when the crown mode is off (when it is not won) (fluctuation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “21” to “28” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  All of the variation pattern numbers “21” to “28” correspond to variation patterns that are out of reach without a reach effect. As described above, in the crown mode, when a non-winning state is satisfied, a mode in which the outreach reach effect is not executed is set. In other words, when the reach effect is executed in the crown mode managed by the main control CPU 72, the winning is determined.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “22” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation pattern selection table (chance mode) during loss.
This selection table is a table used when the chance mode is lost (when it is not won) (fluctuation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “41” to “48” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  The variation pattern numbers “41” to “45” correspond to variation patterns that are out of reach without performing the reach effect, and the variation pattern numbers “46” to “48” are variation patterns that are out of reach after reaching. It corresponds. However, since the variation pattern numbers “41” to “45” are non-reach variations due to time shortening variations, a shortened variation time (for example, about 2.0 seconds) is set as the variation time in the normal state. .

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “42” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern selection table (rush mode) at the time of loss.
This selection table is a table used when the rush mode is off (when it is not won) (fluctuation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “61” to “68” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  All of the variation pattern numbers “61” to “68” correspond to variation patterns that are out of reach without the reach effect. As described above, in the rush mode, when a non-winning state is satisfied, the detach mode is not executed. In the rush mode, in order to realize high-speed digestion of symbol variations, a variation time including a variation time (for example, a variation time of about 1.5 seconds) that is shorter than the variation time in the chance mode is set.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “62” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

[See Fig. 14: Special symbol change pre-processing]
The above steps S2404 and S2405 are control procedures when the big hit determination result is out of place (in the case other than non-winning), but the determination result is a big hit (step S2400: Yes) or a small hit (step S2402: Yes). The main control CPU 72 executes the following procedure. First, the case of jackpot will be described.

  Step S2409a: The main control CPU 72 executes a probability state determination process after the end of the big hit game (probability state determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines whether to set a high probability state or a low probability state with respect to the winning probability of the special symbol after the jackpot game ends based on the probability state determination random number. Specifically, it is determined whether to set a high probability state or a low probability state by referring to the following probability state selection table.

[Probability state selection table]
FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a configuration column of the probability state selection table. When the result of the special symbol lottery corresponds to winning, the main control CPU 72 refers to the probability state selection table and determines whether to set a high probability state or a low probability state after the end of the big hit game.

In the probability state selection table, the distribution value of the probability state is shown in the left column, and each of the distribution values “40” and “60” corresponds to a ratio when the denominator is 100. In the right column, values for setting the probability state designation value corresponding to each distribution value, that is, “00H (low probability state)” and “01H (high probability state)” are shown.
For this reason, at the time of winning in the special symbol lottery, the rate at which “00H (low probability state)” is selected after the jackpot game is over is 40/100 (= 40%), and “01H after the jackpot game is over” The ratio at which “(high probability state)” is selected is 60/100 (= 60%). The size of each distribution value corresponds to the selection ratio of the probability state designation value using the probability state determination random number. Therefore, the ratio that the winning probability of the special symbol becomes a high probability state after the end of the big hit game is 60%.

  As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects a probability state designation value from the selection table shown in FIG. 19, it generates a probability state designation value command reflecting the value of the selected probability state designation value. The generated probability state designation value command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above, for example.

  Step S2410: The main control CPU 72 executes a big hit stop symbol determination process (winning type determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol (stop symbol number at the time of jackpot) for each special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) based on the jackpot symbol random number. The relationship between the jackpot symbol random number value and the winning symbol type is defined in advance in the jackpot stop symbol selection table (winning symbol defining means). For this reason, the main control CPU 72 can determine the type of winning symbol based on the big hit symbol random number from the stored contents by referring to the big hit symbol stop selection table in the big hit symbol stop determination process. However, when determining the stop symbol at the time of the big hit, the main control CPU 72 refers to a different big hit stop symbol selection table depending on the presence or absence of the time reduction state and the value of the probability state designation value determined in the previous step S2409a. It will be. The combinations of the presence / absence of the time shortening state and the value of the probability state designation value are the following four combinations.

(1) Normal state (non-time shortened state) and probability state specified value = 1
(2) Time reduction state and probability state specified value = 1
(3) Normal state (non-time shortened state) and probability state specified value = 0
(4) Time reduction state and probability state specified value = 0

[Winning pattern at the time of big hit]
In the present embodiment, three types of winning symbols are prepared as winning symbols that are selectively determined at the time of the big hit. Specifically, “16 round symbol 1”, “16 round symbol 2”, “16 round symbol” 3 ".

[Special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table (normal state and probability state specified value = 1)]
FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a configuration column of a special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table (normal state and probability state designation value = 1). When the main control CPU 72 is in a normal state (non-time shortening state) and the probability state designation value is “1”, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of winning symbol with reference to this table (winning type defining means). .

  In the table shown in FIG. 20, the left column shows the distribution value for each winning symbol, and each distribution value “25”, “35”, “40” is a ratio when the denominator is 100. Equivalent to. In the second column from the left, “16 round symbol 1”, “16 round symbol 2”, and “16 round symbol 3” corresponding to each distribution value are shown. That is, at the time of the big hit of the special symbol, the ratio that “16 round symbol 1” is selected is 25/100 (= 25%), and the proportion that “16 round symbol 2” is selected is 35/100. 35%). Further, the ratio of selecting “16 round symbols 3” is 40/100 (= 40%).

  In this table, as shown in the third column from the left, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as a stop symbol command at the time of winning. The stop symbol command is described by, for example, a combination of MODE value-EVENT value, and among these, the MODE value “B1H” of the upper byte is selected when the winning symbol of this time is the big hit of the first special symbol. Represents. The MODE value “B2H” of the upper byte indicates that the current winning symbol is selected at the time of the big hit of the second special symbol. On the other hand, the EVENT values “01H”, “02H”, and “03H” in the lower byte represent the types of winning symbols corresponding to each other in the selection table. Therefore, for example, if the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the first special symbol, and “16 round symbol 1” is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command at the time of winning is described as “B1H01H” It will be.

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same selection ratio of the winning symbol selected at the time of the big winning of the internal lottery corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The selection ratio of the winning symbols selected at the time of the big winning of the internal lottery corresponding to each of the two special symbols may be different.

[Time reduction]
In the right column of the selection table shown in FIG. 20, the value of the number of time savings (the number of times in the time shortening state) given after the jackpot game is shown. Specific values for the number of time reductions are as follows.

In the case of “16 round symbol 1” or “16 round symbol 2”, the number of time reductions is given 10,000 times.
In the case of “16 round symbols 3”, the number of time reductions is given 0 times. It should be noted that that the number of time reductions is given 0 means a state that is substantially the same as the state where the time reductions are not given.

  As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects a winning symbol from the selection table shown in FIG. 20, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above, for example. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines a big hit stop symbol number for the special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table (time reduction state and probability state specified value = 1)]
FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a configuration column of a special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table (time reduction state and probability state designation value = 1). The main control CPU 72 determines the type of winning symbol with reference to this table (winning type defining means) when the time reduction state is set and the probability state designation value is “1”.

  In the table shown in FIG. 21, the left column shows the distribution value for each winning symbol, and each distribution value “50” and “50” corresponds to a ratio when the denominator is 100. In the second column from the left, “16 round symbol 1”, “16 round symbol 2”, and “16 round symbol 3” corresponding to each distribution value are shown. That is, at the time of the big hit of the special symbol, the ratio that “16 round symbol 1” is selected is 50/100 (= 50%), and the proportion that “16 round symbol 2” is selected is 50/100 (= 50%). Therefore, in this table, “16 round symbol 3” is not selected.

  In this table, as shown in the third column from the left, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as a stop symbol command at the time of winning. The stop symbol command is described by, for example, a combination of MODE value-EVENT value, and among these, the MODE value “B1H” of the upper byte is selected when the winning symbol of this time is the big hit of the first special symbol. Represents. The MODE value “B2H” of the upper byte indicates that the current winning symbol is selected at the time of the big hit of the second special symbol. On the other hand, the EVENT values “01H” and “02H” in the lower byte represent the types of winning symbols corresponding to each other in the selection table. Therefore, for example, if the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the first special symbol, and “16 round symbol 1” is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command at the time of winning is described as “B1H01H” It will be.

[Time reduction]
In the right column of the selection table shown in FIG. 21, the value of the number of times (time limit state limit number) given after the end of the big hit game is shown. Specific values for the number of time reductions are as follows.

  In the case of “16 round symbol 1” or “16 round symbol 2”, the number of time reductions is given 10,000 times.

  As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects a winning symbol from the selection table shown in FIG. 21, it generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above, for example. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines a big hit stop symbol number for the special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table (normal state and probability state specified value = 0)]
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a configuration column of a special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table (normal state and probability state designation value = 0). When the main control CPU 72 is in the normal state (non-time shortening state) and the probability state designation value is “0”, the main control CPU 72 refers to this table (winning type defining means) to determine the type of winning symbol. .

  In the table shown in FIG. 22, the left column shows the distribution values for each winning symbol, and the distribution values “25”, “35”, and “40” are the ratios when the denominator is 100. Equivalent to. In the second column from the left, “16 round symbol 1”, “16 round symbol 2”, and “16 round symbol 3” corresponding to each distribution value are shown. That is, at the time of the big hit of the special symbol, the ratio that “16 round symbol 1” is selected is 25/100 (= 25%), and the proportion that “16 round symbol 2” is selected is 35/100. 35%). Further, the ratio of selecting “16 round symbols 3” is 40/100 (= 40%).

  In this table, as shown in the third column from the left, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as a stop symbol command at the time of winning. The stop symbol command is described by, for example, a combination of MODE value-EVENT value, and among these, the MODE value “B1H” of the upper byte is selected when the winning symbol of this time is the big hit of the first special symbol. Represents. The MODE value “B2H” of the upper byte indicates that the current winning symbol is selected at the time of the big hit of the second special symbol. On the other hand, the EVENT values “01H”, “02H”, and “03H” in the lower byte represent the types of winning symbols corresponding to each other in the selection table. Therefore, for example, if the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the first special symbol, and “16 round symbol 1” is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command at the time of winning is described as “B1H01H” It will be.

[Time reduction]
In the right column of the selection table shown in FIG. 22, the value of the number of time reductions (the number of times in the time reduction state) given after the end of the big hit game is shown. Specific values for the number of time reductions are as follows.

  In the case of “16 round symbols 1”, the number of time reductions is given 50 times. Similarly, in the case of “16 round symbols 2”, the number of time reductions is given 50 times. On the other hand, in the case of “16 round symbols 3”, the number of time reduction is given 0 times.

  As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects a winning symbol from the selection table shown in FIG. 22, it generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above, for example. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines a big hit stop symbol number for the special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table (time reduction state and probability state specified value = 0)]
FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a configuration column of a special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table (time reduction state and probability state designation value = 0). The main control CPU 72 determines the type of winning symbol with reference to this table (winning type defining means) when the time shortening state and the probability state designation value takes a value of “0”.

  In the table shown in FIG. 23, the left column shows distribution values for each winning symbol, and each distribution value “50” and “50” corresponds to a ratio when the denominator is 100. In the second column from the left, “16 round symbol 1”, “16 round symbol 2”, and “16 round symbol 3” corresponding to each distribution value are shown. That is, at the time of the big hit of the special symbol, the ratio that “16 round symbol 1” is selected is 50/100 (= 50%), and the proportion that “16 round symbol 2” is selected is 50/100 (= 50%). Therefore, in this table, “16 round symbol 3” is not selected.

  In this table, as shown in the third column from the left, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as a stop symbol command at the time of winning. The stop symbol command is described by, for example, a combination of MODE value-EVENT value, and among these, the MODE value “B1H” of the upper byte is selected when the winning symbol of this time is the big hit of the first special symbol. Represents. The MODE value “B2H” of the upper byte indicates that the current winning symbol is selected at the time of the big hit of the second special symbol. On the other hand, the EVENT value “02H” in the lower byte represents the type of the winning symbol corresponding to each in the selection table. Therefore, for example, if the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the first special symbol, and “16 round symbol 1” is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command at the time of winning is described as “B1H01H” It will be.

[Time reduction]
In the right column of the selection table shown in FIG. 23, the value of the number of time reductions (time limit state limit number) given after the end of the big hit game is shown. Specific values for the number of time reductions are as follows.

  In the case of “16 round symbol 1” or “16 round symbol 2”, the number of time reductions is given 50 times.

  As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects a winning symbol from the selection table shown in FIG. 23, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above, for example. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines a big hit stop symbol number for the special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[See Fig. 14: Special symbol change pre-processing]
Step S2412: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a big hit hour variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200. The main control CPU 72 sets the determined variation time value in the variation timer, and sets the stop display time value in the stop symbol display timer. In general, in the case of big hit reach fluctuation, a fluctuation time longer than that at the time of loss is determined.

  In the present embodiment, when the result of the internal lottery corresponds to 16 rounds of big hit, control is performed such as generating a “reach production” for a big win, or making a big hit without generating a “reach production”. I am going to do that. In the “big hit variation pattern selection table”, variation patterns corresponding to a plurality of types of “reach effects” are defined, and in the case of 16 round big hits, one of the variation patterns is selected. Will be. The reach production includes various reach production such as normal reach production, long reach production, battle reach production, and the like. In addition, when winning with the time reduction function activated, a variation pattern having a short variation time (a variation pattern not performing reach production) is selected without selecting a variation pattern having a long variation time. May be.

[Example of big hit fluctuation pattern selection table]
FIG. 24 is a diagram showing an example of the big hit hour variation pattern selection table (normal mode / search mode).
This selection table is a table used when winning in the normal mode or the search mode (variation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “13” to “20” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  The variation pattern numbers “13” to “20” all correspond to the variation pattern that is a hit when the reach effect is performed. Note that such a variation pattern selection table is also used in the prior determination process of the acquisition effect determination process (FIG. 12).

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “14” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating an example of the big hit hour variation pattern selection table (crown mode).
This selection table is a table used when winning in the crown mode (variation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. The “variation pattern numbers” “33” to “40” are assigned to the respective “comparison values”.

  The variation pattern numbers “33” to “40” all correspond to the variation pattern that is a hit when the reach effect is performed. Note that such a variation pattern selection table is also used in the prior determination process of the acquisition effect determination process (FIG. 12).

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “34” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating an example of a big hit hour variation pattern selection table (chance mode).
This selection table is a table used when winning in the chance mode (fluctuation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “53” to “60” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  The variation pattern numbers “53” to “60” all correspond to the variation pattern that is a hit when the reach effect is performed. Note that such a variation pattern selection table is also used in the prior determination process of the acquisition effect determination process (FIG. 12).

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “54” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 27 is a diagram illustrating an example of a big hit hour variation pattern selection table (rush mode).
This selection table is a table used when winning in the rush mode (fluctuation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “73” to “80” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  The variation pattern numbers “73” to “80” all correspond to the variation patterns that are hit without reaching the reach effect. In the rush mode, a variation time including a variation time (for example, a variation time of about 1.5 seconds) that is shorter than the variation time of the chance mode is set in order to realize high-speed digestion of symbol variations. However, a relatively long variation time (for example, about 10 to 30 seconds) is also set in order to execute a re-lottery effect to be described later. Note that such a variation pattern selection table is also used in the prior determination process of the acquisition effect determination process (FIG. 12).

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “74” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

[See Fig. 14: Special symbol change pre-processing]
Step S2414: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a big hit other setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the probability variation function activation flag value (01H) in the flag area of the RAM 76 as a gaming state flag when the value of the probability state designation value determined in the previous step S2409a is “01H”. (High probability state transition means, probability variation function actuating means). Further, when the value of the probability state designation value determined in the previous step S2409a is “00H”, the main control CPU 72 resets the value of the probability variation function operation flag as the gaming state flag (low probability state setting means, low probability State transition means).

  The main control CPU 72 determines the time as the gaming state flag when the type of winning symbol (hit stop symbol number) determined in the previous step S2410 is either “16 round symbol 1” or “16 round symbol 2”. The value (01H) of the shortening function operation flag is set in the flag area of the RAM 76 (time shortening state transition means, time shortening function operation means).

  In the process of step S2414, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (big hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the big hit time stop symbol number. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a lottery result command (at the time of the big hit) together with the stop symbol command (at the time of the big hit). The stop symbol command and the lottery result command are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Next, processing for small hits will be described.
Step S2407: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit stop symbol determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of winning symbol at the time of small hit (stop symbol number at small hit) based on the big hit symbol random number. Similarly, the relationship between the big winning symbol random number value and the type of winning symbol at the time of small hitting is preliminarily defined in the special symbol selection table at small hitting (winning type defining means). In this embodiment, in order to reduce the load on the main control CPU 72, the winning symbol at the time of the small hit is determined using the big hit symbol random number, but a dedicated random number may be used separately.

[Winning pattern for small hits]
In the present embodiment, the winning symbol at the time of small hitting is only one type of “twice open small hitting symbol”. However, other types such as “one time opening small hit symbol” and “three times opening small hit symbol” may be prepared. As described above, “small hit” as a result of the internal lottery is not an opportunity for the subsequent state to change to “high probability state” or “time reduction state”, and thus is essential for this type of pachinko machine. A “one-time small hit symbol” can be provided without being bound by the definition of “two rounds (two times open) or more”.

  Step S2408: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a small hit hour variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200 (variation pattern selection means). ). Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the determined variation time value in the variation timer, and sets the stop display time value in the stop symbol display timer. In the present embodiment, the reach variation pattern can be selected in the case of a small hit, or a variation pattern equivalent to that in the normal variation can be selected.

  Step S2409: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a small hitting and other setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (small hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the stop symbol number at the time of small hit. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of a small hit) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. The stop symbol command and the lottery result command are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  Step S2415: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes special symbol variation start processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 selects the fluctuation pattern data based on the fluctuation pattern number (out of time / hit). At the same time, the main control CPU 72 sets a special symbol variation start flag in the flag area of the RAM 76. Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a change start command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. This variation start command is also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol changing process (step S3000) as the next jump destination and returns to the special symbol game process.

[Figure 13: Special symbol change processing, special symbol stop display processing]
In the special symbol fluctuation processing, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the fluctuation timer from the register to the timer counter as described above, and then the timer according to the passage of time (clock pulse count number or interrupt counter value). Decrement the counter value. The main control CPU 72 controls the special symbol variation display as described above until the value becomes 0 while referring to the value of the timer counter. When the value of the timer counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol stop display in-progress process (step S4000) as the next jump destination.

  In the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 controls the special symbol stop display based on the stop symbol determined in the stop symbol determination process (step S2404, step S2407, and step S2410 in FIG. 14). The main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. The symbol stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. When the stop symbol is displayed for a predetermined time in the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 deletes the symbol changing flag.

[Special symbol memory area shift processing]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol storage area shift process. When the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is greater than “0” in the previous special symbol fluctuation pre-processing (step S2100: Yes in FIG. 14), the main control CPU 72 Executes this special symbol storage area shift process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S2210: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the operation memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol that is preferentially consumed is “0”. At this time, if the value of the operation memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol is “1” or more (No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S2212.

  Step S2212: The main control CPU 72 designates the second special symbol as a special symbol for shifting the storage area. This designation is performed, for example, by setting “02H” as the target symbol designation value.

  Step S2214: On the other hand, when the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol is “0” (step S2210: Yes), the main control CPU 72 uses the first special symbol as a special symbol to be shifted in the storage area. Is specified. The designation in this case is performed, for example, by setting “01H” as the target symbol designation value.

  Step S2216: The main control CPU 72 shifts the random number storage area of the RAM 76 for the target special symbol designated in either step S2212 or step S2214. The details of the specific processing are as already described in the previous special symbol change pre-processing.

  Step S2218: Next, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the operation memory counter for the target special symbol. For example, if the target to shift the current storage area is the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 subtracts (-1) the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol.

  Step S2220: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets “the number of operation memories at the start of fluctuation” from the value of the operation memory counter after the subtraction. Here, for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the value of the operation memory counter may be added and the “number of operation memories at the start of change” may be set.

Step S2222: The main control CPU 72 also checks whether or not the special symbol to be shifted in the current storage area is the second special symbol.
Step S2224: When the target is the second special symbol (step S2222: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the working command when the number of working memories is reduced for the second special symbol. The effect command set here is also generated as a one-word-length command, but its structure is in contrast to the above-described “effect command when increasing the number of working memories”. That is, the production command at the time when the number of working memories decreases is lower than the value of lower bytes (for example, “00H” to “03H” that represents the number of working memories after reduction with respect to the preceding value (for example, “BCH”) of the upper bytes representing the command type )) And an additional value (for example, “10H”) meaning “decrease in the number of working memories accompanying consumption” is further added (logical sum) to the lower byte value. Therefore, for the lower byte, the second value becomes “1” by ORing the added value “10H”, and this value represents “the result (change information) due to the decrease in the number of working memories”. It will be a thing. In other words, if the lower byte of the command is “13H”, it means that the number of working memories up to the previous time “4” (command notation is “14H”) is reduced by one, so that the number of working memories this time is “3” (command The notation is “13H”). Similarly, if the lower byte is “12H” to “10H”, it means that the number of working memories “3” to “1” up to the previous time (command notation is “13H” to “11H”) is decreased by one respectively. This indicates that the current operation memory number is “2” to “0” (command notation is “12H” to “10H”). The preceding value “BCH” is a value indicating that the current effect command is the working memory number command for the second special symbol.

  Step S2226: If the current target is the first special symbol (Step S2222: No), the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command for reducing the number of working memories regarding the first special symbol. The command in this case is the same as the above except that the preceding value is a value (for example, “BBH”) indicating that the previous value is the working memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S2228: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes an effect command output process. This process is for transmitting the production command for reducing the number of working memories set in the previous step S2224 or step S2226 to the production control device 124 (memory number notification means).
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol variation pre-processing (FIG. 14).

[Special symbol stop display processing]
Next, FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol stop display process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S4100: The main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the stop symbol display timer (decrements by the interrupt period).

  Step S4200: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the stop display time has ended based on the value of the stop symbol display timer subtracted this time. Specifically, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is not 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has not yet ended (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process, and jumps from the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 13) and repeatedly executes the special symbol stop display process in the next interrupt cycle.

  On the other hand, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has ended (Yes). In this case, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4250.

  Step S4250: The main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command. The symbol stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. Further, the main control CPU 72 deletes the symbol changing flag here.

  Step S4300: Here, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the big hit flag (01H) is set. When the value of the big hit flag (01H) is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4350.

[When winning]
Step S4350: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination of the jump table to “variable winning device management process”.
Step S4400: The main control CPU 72 sets “start of big role (during big hit game)” as an internal state flag for control. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a status command representing a big hit. The state command representing the big hit is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  Step S4500: The main control CPU 72 generates a continuous operation number command. The continuous operation number command can be generated based on the type of jackpot symbol (stop symbol number) determined in the previous jackpot stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 14). For example, if the type of jackpot symbol is any one of “16 round symbols 1” to “16 round symbols 3”, the continuous operation number command is generated as a value representing “16 rounds”. In this embodiment, since “16 round big hit” is adopted, the continuous operation number command is generated as a value representing “16 rounds”. However, when a jackpot having a number of rounds other than “16 rounds”, for example, a jackpot of “6 rounds” is adopted, the continuous operation number command is generated as a value representing “6 rounds”. The generated continuous operation number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  When the above procedure is completed at the time of the big hit, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process.

[When not winning]
On the other hand, the following procedure is executed in cases other than the big hit.
That is, if the main control CPU 72 determines in step S4300 that the value of the big hit flag (01H) is not set (No), it next executes step S4600.

  Step S4600: The main control CPU 72 next checks whether or not the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set. If the value of the small hit flag (01H) is not set and is simply a deviation (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4602.

  Step S4602: The main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol variation pre-processing address as the jump destination address of the jump table.

  Step S4605: On the other hand, if the value (01H) of the small hit flag is set (step S4600: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the address of the variable winning device management process as the jump destination address of the jump table.

  Step S4606: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets “small hit start (medium hit)” as an internal state flag for control. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a status command indicating that a small hit is being made. The state command representing the small hit is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  Step S4608: The main control CPU 72 executes mode management processing. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes processing for managing various modes such as the normal mode. The contents of the mode management process will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

  Step 4610: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the count-down counter. In the “counting counter”, the counter values are set in the probability variation count area and the time reduction count area of the RAM 76 in the “high probability state” and the “time reduction state”. In this case, “number of times cut” is used, but the value of the number of times counter in the “high probability state” can be set to an extremely large value (for example, 10,000 times or more). By setting such an enormous value, it is possible to probabilistically guarantee that the “high probability state” will continue until the next winning is substantially obtained. In the case where there is only a single “time reduction state” instead of the “high probability state”, the count-off counter is set to a standard numerical value (eg, 100 times).

  Step S4620: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the loaded counter value is zero. At this time, if the count cut counter value is already 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. On the other hand, when the count cut counter value is not 0 (No), after generating the count cut counter value command, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4630.

Step S4630: The main control CPU 72 decrements (subtracts 1) the count-down counter value.
Step S4640: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the subtraction result is not zero. As a result of the subtraction, when the value of the number cut counter is not 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. On the other hand, if the value of the number cut counter becomes 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S4650.

  Step S4650: Here, the main control CPU 72 resets a flag at the time of turning off the number of times function. The probability variable function operation flag or the time shortening function operation flag is reset, but since the value of the count counter is not zero in the “high probability state” as described above, it is practical. It is the time reduction function activation flag that is reset above. As a result, the time reduction state ends after the special symbol stop display. When the above procedure is completed, the process returns to the special symbol game process.

[Mode management processing]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart illustrating an exemplary procedure of the mode management process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S4660: The main control CPU 72 loads the variation pattern selection counter value from the RAM 76, and checks whether or not the variation pattern selection counter value is greater than “0”. Here, the “variation pattern selection counter value” is a variable that is referred to when various modes managed by the main control CPU 72 are shifted. The setting of the variation pattern selection counter value is performed in a mode setting process (FIG. 38) described later.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the variation pattern selection counter value is larger than “0” (step S4660: Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S4662. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the variation pattern selection counter value is not larger than “0”, for example, when the variation pattern selection counter value is “0” (step S4660: No), the main control CPU 72 Return to the special symbol stop display process (FIG. 29).

  Step S4662: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of decrementing (decrementing by 1) the variation pattern selection counter value.

Step S4664: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the variation pattern selection counter value is “0”.
As a result, when it is confirmed that the variation pattern selection counter value is “0” (step S4664: Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S4666. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the variation pattern selection counter value is not “0” (step S4664: No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol stop display processing (FIG. 29).

Step S4666: The main control CPU 72 executes main control mode status update processing. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes processing for updating the set value of the main control mode status. The contents of the main control mode status update process will be further described later with reference to another drawing.
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol stop display process (FIG. 29).

[Main control mode status update processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the main control mode status update process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S4700: The main control CPU 72 loads the main control mode status. Here, as described above, the “main control mode status” is a variable that holds identification numbers corresponding to various modes, and the main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the main control mode status to indicate the current stay. You can check the mode.

Step S4702: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the main control mode status indicates the value of the chance mode in the high probability state.
As a result, when it is confirmed that the value of the main control mode status indicates the value of the chance mode in the high probability state (step S4702: Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S4708. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the value of the main control mode status does not indicate the value of the chance mode in the high probability state (step S4702: No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S4704.

Step S4704: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the main control mode status indicates the value of the chance mode in the low probability state or the value of the search mode in the low probability state.
As a result, when it is confirmed that the value of the main control mode status indicates the value of the chance mode in the low probability state or the value of the search mode in the low probability state (step S4704: Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S4710. Run. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the value of the main control mode status indicates neither the value of the chance mode in the low probability state nor the value of the search mode in the low probability state (step S4704: No), The control CPU 72 executes step S4706.

Step S4706: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the main control mode status indicates the value of the search mode in the high probability state.
As a result, when it is confirmed that the value of the main control mode status indicates the value of the search mode in the high probability state (step S4706: Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S4712. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the value of the main control mode status does not indicate the value of the search mode in the high probability state (step S4706: No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the mode management process (FIG. 30). .

  Step S4708: The main control CPU 72 sets a value corresponding to the rush mode in the main control mode status. As a result, the state (rush mode) clearly shows that the winning probability of the special symbol is a high probability state from the state where it is unknown whether the winning probability of the special symbol is a high probability state or a low probability state. Can be migrated.

  Step S4710: The main control CPU 72 sets a value corresponding to the normal mode in the main control mode status. As a result, from the state where it is unclear whether the winning probability of a special symbol is a high probability state or a low probability state, the state (normal mode) clearly shows that the winning probability of a special symbol is a low probability state. Can be migrated.

  Step S4712: The main control CPU 72 sets a value corresponding to the crown mode in the main control mode status. As a result, the state (crown mode) clearly shows that the winning probability of the special symbol is a high probability state from the state where it is unknown whether the winning probability of the special symbol is a high probability state or a low probability state. Can be migrated.

When the main control mode status value is updated, the main control CPU 72 generates a main control mode status command reflecting the value. The main control mode status command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 8).
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol stop display process (FIG. 29).

[Display output management processing]
Next, FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 8) executed in the interrupt management process. The display output management process includes a special symbol display setting process (step S1200), a normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), a state display setting process (step S1220), an operation memory display setting process (step S1230), and a continuous operation number display setting. This is a configuration including a subroutine group of processing (step S1240).

  Among these, the special symbol display setting process (step S1200), the normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), and the operation memory display setting process (step S1230) are the first special symbol display device 34, the second, as already described. Generates drive signals to be applied to the LEDs of the special symbol display device 35, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, and the second special symbol operation memory number display lamp 35a. And output processing.

  The state display setting process (step S1220) and the continuous operation number display setting process (step S1240) are processes for generating and outputting a drive signal to be applied to each LED of the gaming state display device 38. First, in the state display setting process, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the probability variation state display lamp 38c and the time reduction state display lamp 38d, respectively, according to the value of the probability variation function activation flag or the time reduction function activation flag. For example, if the value (01H) is set in the probability variation function operation flag when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the probability variation state display lamp 38c. Note that the probability variation state display lamp 38c is switched to non-display (turned off) even if the probability variation function operation flag is set when the variation display of the special symbol is performed thereafter. On the other hand, if the value (01H) is set in the time reduction function operation flag, the main control CPU 72 turns on the lighting signal for the LED corresponding to the time reduction state display lamp 38d regardless of whether or not the power is turned on. Is output.

  The main control CPU 72 controls lighting of the big hit type display lamp 38a in the continuous operation number display setting process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal for the jackpot type display lamp 38a based on the value of the above-mentioned continuous operation number command. At this time, the display lamp 38a corresponding to the big hit symbol designated by the continuous operation number command is the target of outputting the lighting signal. In this embodiment, since the value of the continuous operation number command specifies “16 rounds”, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the display lamp 38 a representing “16 rounds (16R)”.

[Variable winning device management process]
Next, details of the variable winning device management process will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart illustrating a configuration example of the variable winning device management process. The variable winning device management process includes a gaming process selection process (step S5100), a special winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5200), a special winning opening / closing operation process (step S5300), a special winning opening closing process (step S5400), and an end. This is a configuration including a subroutine group of processing (step S5500).

  Step S5100: In the game process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S5200 to S5500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the variable winning device management process in the stack pointer as the return destination address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening / closing operation) of the variable winning device 30 has not started yet, the main control CPU 72 selects the large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5200) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the winning opening opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the winning opening opening / closing operation process (step S5300) as the next jump destination, and has completed the winning opening opening / closing operation process. Then, the special winning opening closing process (step S5400) is selected as the next jump destination. When the big prize opening / closing operation process and the big prize opening closing process are repeatedly executed over the set number of continuous operations (number of rounds), the main control CPU 72 selects an end process (step S5500) as the next jump destination. . Hereinafter, each process will be described in more detail.

[Big prize opening pattern setting process]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the special winning opening opening pattern setting process. This process is for setting conditions such as the number of times that the variable winning device 30 is opened and closed and the time for each opening at the time of big hit or small hit. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S5202: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the current gaming state is a big game, that is, whether or not the big hit flag value (01H) is set in the flag area of the RAM 76. If the value of the big hit flag is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5204. On the other hand, if the value of the big hit flag is not set (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S5212. Note that this procedure may be rewritten to refer to the value of the small hit flag (however, the logic of Yes / No is reversed).

[Procedure for jackpot]
First, the procedure for the big hit is as follows.
Step S5204: The main control CPU 72 executes a design-specific release pattern setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the winning pattern opening pattern (number of times of opening for each round and the time of each opening), the interval time between rounds, and the number of counts in one round (maximum) according to the current winning symbol. Set the number of winnings). The opening pattern for each winning symbol is the same as described in the item “plural winning types” in the special symbol game process (FIG. 13). The interval time between rounds is set to about several seconds (for example, 2 seconds to 2.5 seconds) for “16 round symbols”, for example. Note that the number of counts in one round (maximum number of winnings) is, for example, 9 for all winning symbols, but winnings rarely occur during an extremely short opening (about 0.1 seconds) ( Not impossible but extremely difficult).

  Step S5206: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds in the current jackpot game based on the jackpot winning symbol selected in the previous jackpot stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 14). Specifically, if any of “16 round symbols 1” to “16 round symbols 3” is selected as the winning symbol, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to 16 times. The number of execution rounds set here is stored in the buffer area of the RAM 76, for example, as a corresponding value on the program (“15” if 16 times).

  Step S5208: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets a big hit opening timer based on the big winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S5204. The timer value set here is the opening time per operation when the variable winning device 30 is operated. If a value of about 29.0 seconds is set as the value of the big hit release timer, the release time is a sufficient time (for example, a launch control board) that the big winning opening is easily generated during one release. The set 174 is a time during which 10 or more game balls are fired, preferably 6 seconds or more. On the other hand, if the value of the big hit release timer is set to 0.1 seconds, the release time is short (becomes difficult) even if it is not possible to win a big prize opening during one opening. This is a time (for example, a time shorter than 1 second, preferably a time shorter than a game ball firing interval by the firing control board set 174).

  Step S5210: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets a big hit interval timer based on the big winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S5204. The timer value set here is the waiting time between rounds of big hits.

  Step S5220: When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening / closing operation processing, and returns to the variable winning device management processing.

[Procedure for small hits]
Step S5212: On the other hand, in the case of a small hit (step S5202: No), the main control CPU 72 sets a “small hit opening pattern”. In the case of the present embodiment, for the “small hit opening pattern”, for example, an opening pattern of “0.1 second opening” is set for the first time and the second time. Since “small hit” has no concept of “round”, “open pattern” is also expressed as “first open” and “second open”.

  Step S5214: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of times that the special winning opening is opened based on the large winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S5212, for example, two times. The number of releases set here is stored in a buffer area of the RAM 76, for example.

  Step S5216: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets a small hitting release timer. The timer value set here is the opening time per operation when the variable winning device 30 is operated. In the present embodiment, as described above, 0.1 seconds is set as the value of the small hitting release timer, and during such an opening time, there is hardly any winning in the big winning opening during one opening. It becomes a short time (becomes difficult) (for example, a time shorter than 1 second, preferably a time shorter than the interval between game balls fired by the launching device unit).

  Step S5218: The main control CPU 72 sets a small hitting interval timer. The timer value set here is a waiting time for each time when the variable winning device 30 is opened and closed a plurality of times at the time of a small hit, and this timer value is set to about 2 seconds, for example.

  Step S5220: When the above procedure is completed at the time of the small hit, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening / closing operation processing, and returns to the variable winning device management processing. Then, the main control CPU 72 executes a special winning opening / closing operation process.

[Big prize opening / closing operation processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the special winning opening / closing operation process. This process is mainly for controlling the opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 30. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along a procedure.

  Step S5302: The main control CPU 72 opens the special winning opening. Specifically, a drive signal to be applied to the special winning opening solenoid 90 is output. Thereby, the variable prize-winning apparatus 30 operates and shifts from the closed state to the open state.

  Step S5304: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an open timer countdown process. In this process, the countdown of the release timer set in the previous special winning opening release pattern setting process (step S5208 or step S5216 in FIG. 34) is executed.

  Step S5306: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the release timer after the countdown process is 0 or less. If the value of the release timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5308. Execute.

  Step S5308: The main control CPU 72 executes a winning ball count process. In this process, the number of game balls won in the variable winning device 30 (open winning opening) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the count value based on the winning detection signal input from the count switch 84 within the opening time.

  Step S5310: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (9). This predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (upper limit of the number of winning balls) allowed per opening (one round in the big hit, one in the small hit) as described above. If the count has not yet reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process. Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, since the jump destination is set to the large winning opening / closing operation process at the present stage, the main control CPU 72 repeatedly executes the procedure of the above steps S5302 to S5310.

  If it is determined in step S5306 that the opening time has expired (Yes), or if it is confirmed in step S5310 that the count has reached a predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5312. Note that the release at the time of the small hit is that the value of the release timer is set to a short time, and therefore, the main control CPU 72 normally confirms that the count number has reached the predetermined number in step S5310 before step S5306. In most cases, it is determined that the opening time has ended.

  Step S5312: The main control CPU 72 closes the special winning opening. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the special winning opening solenoid 90 is stopped. As a result, the variable winning device 30 returns from the open state to the closed state.

  Step S5314: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes interval standby processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes the countdown of the interval timer set in the above-described special winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5210 or step S5218 in FIG. 34). When the value of the interval timer becomes 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S5316.

  Step S5316: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not it is in a big role (during big hit game). If the current game is a big game (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5318. On the other hand, if the current game is a small hit (No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5322.

  Step S5318: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the opening number counter. Note that the value of the number-of-releases counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76 with an initial value of 0, for example.

  Step S5320: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the incremented number-of-releases counter has reached the number set within the current round. Here, the reason why the “number of times set in the current round” is determined is to deal with an opening pattern of “opening the variable winning device 30 multiple times within one round of big hit”, for example. . In the present embodiment, since such an open pattern is not particularly employed, the “number of times set in the current round” is set once for each round. Therefore, since the counter value reaches the set number of times in one opening / closing operation (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next proceeds to step S5322.

  If a pattern in which a plurality of opening / closing operations are repeated in one round as described above is employed, the counter value has not yet reached the set number of times at the end of one opening (No). In this case, when the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process, the jump destination is set to the big winning opening / closing operation process at the present stage, and thus the procedure from step S5302 to step S5320 is repeatedly executed. As a result, the increment of the number-of-releases counter proceeds in step S5318, and when the counter value reaches the set number of times (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S5322.

  Step S5322: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening closing process, and returns to the variable winning device management process. Then, when the variable winning device management process is executed next, the main control CPU 72 executes a special winning opening closing process.

[Large prize closing process]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for a special prize closing process. This special winning opening closing process is for continuing the operation of the variable winning device 30 or terminating the operation. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along a procedure.

  Step S5401: First, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current game is a big game (big hit game), and if it is a big game (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5402.

  Step S5402: The main control CPU 72 increments the round number counter. Thereby, for example, the value of the round number counter is “1” at the stage where the first round ends and the second round is reached.

  Step S5404: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the incremented round number counter value has reached the set number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value (1-14) of the round number counter after increment, and if the value is less than the set number of execution rounds (1-14 after 1 subtraction) (No) Next, step S5405 is executed.

  Step S5405: The main control CPU 72 generates a round number command from the current round number counter value. This command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process as described above. The effect control device 124 can confirm the current number of rounds based on the received round number command.

  Step S5406: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination in the big prize opening / closing operation process.

  Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball counter and returns to the variable winning device management process.

  When the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 executes a big prize opening opening / closing operation process which is the next jump destination in the game process selection process (step S5100 in FIG. 33). Then, after execution of the special prize opening / closing operation process, through the execution of the special prize opening closing process, the main control CPU 72 executes the special prize opening closing process again, and repeatedly executes the above steps S5402 to S5408. Thereby, the opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 30 is continuously executed until the actual round number reaches the set execution round number (16 times).

  When the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (step S5404: YES), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5410.

  Step S5410, Step S5412: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets the round number counter (= 0), it sets the next jump destination to the end process.

  Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball counter and returns to the variable winning device management process. As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the end process is selected this time.

[Small hit]
On the other hand, in the case of a small hit, the procedure is as follows (special operation execution means).
Step S5411: When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the current game is not playing a major role (step S5401: No), the main control CPU 72 increments the value of the number-of-releases counter.

  Step S5413: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the incremented number-of-releases counter has reached the set number of times of release. The number of times of opening is set in the previous big opening opening pattern setting process (step S5214 in FIG. 34). If the value of the opening number counter has not yet reached the set opening number (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5416.

Step S5416: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination in the special winning opening / closing operation process.
Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball counter and returns to the variable winning device management process.

  When the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 executes a big prize opening opening / closing operation process which is the next jump destination in the game process selection process (step S5100 in FIG. 33). Then, after the execution of the special prize opening / closing operation process, the main control CPU 72 executes the special prize opening closing process again through the execution of the special prize opening closing process, and goes through the above steps S5401 to S5413 (No) to step S5416. Step S5408 is repeatedly executed. Thereby, the opening / closing operation of the variable prize device 30 is repeatedly executed until the actual number of times of opening reaches the set number of times of opening (2 times).

  When the actual number of times of opening at the small hit reaches the set number of times of opening (step S5413: Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5414.

  Step S5414, Step S5412: In this case, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the end process when the release counter is reset (= 0).

  Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball counter and returns to the variable winning device management process. As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the end process is selected this time.

〔End processing〕
FIG. 37 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the end process. This end process is for preparing conditions for ending the operation of the variable prize apparatus 30. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S5502: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the big hit flag (01H) is set, and if the value of the big hit flag is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5503. To do.

  Step S5503, Step S5504: In this case, the main control CPU 72 resets the big hit flag (00H). As a result, the big hit gaming state ends on the control processing of the main control CPU 72. In addition, the main control CPU 72 deletes “big hit” from the internal state flag and declares the end of the major role as the internal state in the control processing.

Step S5505: The main control CPU 72 deletes the continuous operation number command here.
Step S5506: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value (01H) of the probability variation function operation flag is set. This flag is set in the big hit other setting process (step S2414 in FIG. 14) during the previous special symbol fluctuation pre-processing.

  Step S5508: When the value of the probability variation function operation flag is set (step S5506: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the probability variation number (for example, about 10,000 times). The set value of the probability variation number is stored, for example, in the probability variation counter area of the RAM 76 and becomes the above-described number cut counter value. The probability variation number set here is the upper limit number of times that the variation of the special symbol (internal lottery) is performed in a high probability state in the subsequent games. However, if a huge number of times such as 10,000 is set as described above, there is almost no chance that the non-winning will continue so far (the winning probability at the time of high probability is, for example, 1/39 to 1/39) The degree of probability) will continue until the next winning. On the other hand, when a substantial upper limit is set in the high probability state, the probability variation number is set to a realistic number (for example, about 10 times) (so-called number cut probability change). If the value of the probability variation function activation flag is not set (step S5506: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S5508.

  Step S5510: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the time reduction function operation flag (01H) is set. This flag is also set in the big hit other setting process (step S2414 in FIG. 14) during the previous special symbol fluctuation pre-processing.

  Step S5512: If the value of the time reduction function operation flag is set (step S5510: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the number of time reductions (for example, about 100 times or about 10,000 times). The value of the set time reduction count is stored in the time count area of the RAM 76 as described above. The number of times of time reduction set here is the upper limit number of times to shorten the variation time of the special symbol in subsequent games. If the value of the time shortening function activation flag is not set (step S5510: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S5512.

  Step S5514: The main control CPU 72 generates a state designation command based on various flags. Specifically, a state designation command representing “normal” is generated as the gaming state when the big hit flag is reset or the big game ends. If the high-probability state function activation flag is set, a state designation command indicating “high probability” is generated as the internal state, and if the time reduction function activation flag is set, the internal state is “reduced time”. A state designation command representing “medium” is generated. These state designation commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

  The procedure so far is a big hit, but in the case of a big hit (step S5502: No), the following procedure is executed.

  Steps S5520 and S5522: In the case of a small hit, the main control CPU 72 resets the value of the small hit flag (00H) and deletes “small hit” from the internal state flag. In the case of small hits, the internal condition device does not operate in particular, so such a procedure is merely for the purpose of erasing the flag.

  Step S5515: The main control CPU 72 executes a mode setting process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes processing for setting various modes such as the normal mode. The contents of the mode setting process will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

  Step S5516: After the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination in the special winning opening opening pattern setting process.

  Step S5518: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 13) in the special symbol game process to the special symbol change pre-process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process.

[Mode setting processing]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart illustrating an exemplary procedure of the mode setting process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

Step S5600: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current winning symbol corresponds to “16 round symbol 1”.
As a result, when it is confirmed that the current winning symbol corresponds to “16 round symbol 1” (step S5600: Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5601. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the current winning symbol does not correspond to “16 round symbol 1” (step S5600: No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5602.

Step S5601: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the probability state designation value is “1”.
As a result, when it is confirmed that the value of the probability state designation value is “1” (step S5601: YES), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5610. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the value of the probability state designation value is not “1” (“0”) (step S5601: No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5614.

Step S5602: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current winning symbol corresponds to “16 round symbol 2”.
As a result, when it is confirmed that the current winning symbol corresponds to “16 round symbol 2” (step S5602: YES), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5604. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the current winning symbol does not correspond to “16 round symbol 2” (step S5602: No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5606.

Step S5604: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the probability state designation value is “1”.
As a result, when it is confirmed that the value of the probability state designation value is “1” (step S5604: YES), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5616. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the value of the probability state designation value is not “1” (“0”) (step S5604: No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5614.

Step S5606: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current winning symbol corresponds to “16 round symbol 3”.
As a result, when it is confirmed that the current winning symbol corresponds to “16 round symbol 3” (step S5606: Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5608. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the current winning symbol does not correspond to “16 round symbol 3” (step S5606: No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the end process (FIG. 37).

Step S5608: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the probability state designation value is “1”.
As a result, when it is confirmed that the value of the probability state designation value is “1” (step S5608: Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5618. In contrast, when it is confirmed that the value of the probability state designation value is not “1” (“0”) (step S5608: No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5620.

Step S5610: The main control CPU 72 sets a value corresponding to the rush mode in the main control mode status.
Step S5612: The main control CPU 72 sets “0” to the variation pattern selection counter value.

Step S5614: The main control CPU 72 sets a value corresponding to the chance mode in the low probability state in the main control mode status.
Step S5616: The main control CPU 72 sets a value corresponding to the high probability state chance mode in the main control mode status.
Step S5618: The main control CPU 72 sets a value corresponding to the search mode in the high probability state in the main control mode status.
Step S5620: The main control CPU 72 sets a value corresponding to the search mode in the low probability state in the main control mode status.

  Step S5622: When any of the processing from step S5614 to step S5620 is executed, the main control CPU 72 sets “50” to the variation pattern selection counter value. The set variation pattern selection counter value is decremented by 1 each time the special symbol is stopped and displayed once.

When the main control mode status value is set, the main control CPU 72 generates a main control mode status command reflecting the value. The main control mode status command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 8).
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the end process (FIG. 37).

[Game Flow]
FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating a game flow developed in the pachinko machine 1.
When a game is started with the pachinko machine 1, the game is started from [F1] normal mode. In the “normal mode”, the winning probability of the special symbol is a low probability state, and is a non-time shortened state. [F1] Since the normal mode is a non-time shortening state, the first special symbol starts to change and the game proceeds by generating a prize at the top start prize opening 26.

  [F1] In normal mode, when [F2] 16-round symbol 1 is won and the probability state designation value is “1”, a 16-round big hit game is executed, and [F3] rush mode is entered. [F3] In “rush mode”, the winning probability of the special symbol is a high probability state, and the time is shortened.

[F1] In the normal mode, when [F4] 16-round symbol 1 is won and the probability state designation value is “0”, the 16-round big hit game is executed, and [F5] the chance mode is entered.
In [F1] normal mode, when [F6] 16-round symbol 2 is won and the probability state designation value is “0” or “1”, a 16-round jackpot game is executed and [F5] chance Enter the mode.
[F5] In the chance mode, the winning probability of the special symbol is a low probability state or a high probability state, and is a time shortening state. When the winning probability of the special symbol is in a low probability state, [F7] After the big hit game is over, after 50 fluctuations have passed, [F1] shift to the normal mode. On the other hand, when the winning probability of the special symbol is in a high probability state, after [F8] jackpot game is over and after 50 fluctuations, [F3] shifts to the rush mode.

[F1] In normal mode, when [F9] 16-round symbol 3 is won and the probability state designation value is “0” or “1”, a 16-round jackpot game is executed, and [F10] search mode Rush into.
[F10] In the search mode, the winning probability of the special symbol is a low probability state or a high probability state, and is a non-time shortened state. When the winning probability of the special symbol is in a low probability state, [F11] After the big hit game is over, after [50 variation], [F1] shift to the normal mode. On the other hand, when the winning probability of the special symbol is in a high probability state, after [F12] jackpot game is over, after 50 fluctuations, [F13] shifts to the crown mode. [F13] In the crown mode, the winning probability of the special symbol is a high probability state, and is a non-time shortened state.

  In [F3] rush mode, if [F14] 16-round symbol 1 is won and the probability state designation value is “1”, a 16-round jackpot game is executed, and [F3] rush mode is continued. .

  [F3] In rush mode, when [F15] 16-round symbol 1 is won and the probability state designation value is “0”, a 16-round big hit game is executed, and [F5] shifts to chance mode .

  [F3] In rush mode, when [F16] 16-round symbol 2 is won and the probability status designation value is “0” or “1”, a 16-round jackpot game is executed, and [F5] chance mode It is transferred to.

  [F5] In chance mode, when [F17] 16-round symbol 1 is won and the probability state designation value is “1”, a 16-round big hit game is executed, and [F3] rush mode is entered. .

  [F5] In chance mode, when [F18] 16-round symbol 1 is won and the probability state designation value is “0”, 16-round big hit game is executed, and [F5] chance mode is continued. .

  [F5] Chance mode, when [F19] 16-round symbol 2 is won and the probability state designation value is “0” or “1”, a 16-round jackpot game is executed, and [F5] chance mode Is continued.

  [F10] In search mode, when [F20] 16-round symbol 1 is won and the probability state designation value is “1”, a 16-round jackpot game is executed, and [F3] rush mode is entered. .

  [F10] In search mode, when [F21] 16-round symbol 1 is won and the probability state designation value is “0”, a 16-round jackpot game is executed, and [F5] shifts to chance mode .

  [F10] In search mode, when [F22] 16-round symbol 2 is won and the probability state designation value is “0” or “1”, a 16-round jackpot game is executed, and [F5] chance mode It is transferred to.

  [F10] In search mode, when [F23] 16 round symbol 3 is won and the probability state designation value is “0” or “1”, a 16 round jackpot game is executed, and [F10] search mode Is continued.

  [F13] In crown mode, if [F24] 16-round symbol 1 is won and the probability state designation value is “1”, a 16-round jackpot game is executed and [F3] rush mode is entered .

  [F13] In crown mode, if [F25] 16-round symbol 1 is won and the probability state designation value is “0”, a 16-round jackpot game is executed and [F5] shifts to chance mode .

  [F13] In crown mode, if [F26] 16-round symbol 2 is won and the probability state designation value is “0” or “1”, a 16-round jackpot game is executed, and [F5] chance mode It is transferred to.

  [F13] In crown mode, when [F27] 16-round symbol 3 is won and the probability state designation value is “0” or “1”, a 16-round jackpot game is executed, and [F10] search mode It is transferred to.

[Example of production image]
Next, the effect image actually displayed on the dot matrix LED display 42 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with some examples. As described above, when the big hit internal lottery is performed in the pachinko machine 1, the variation pattern (variation time, etc.) is determined under the control of the main control CPU 72, and the variation display by the special symbol is performed (symbol display means). . However, as described above, the special symbol itself is a lighting / flashing display by a 7-segment LED, so that the appealing power is not good. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, a variable display effect using the effect symbol is performed.

  The effect symbols include, for example, a left effect symbol, a middle effect symbol, and a right effect symbol, which are displayed side by side on the left, middle, and right on the dot matrix LED display 42 screen. Each effect symbol is, for example, a number “0” to “9” is expressed. For all effect symbols (left effect symbol, middle effect symbol, and right effect symbol), a symbol row is formed in which numbers are arranged in ascending order of “0” to “9”. In addition, under special conditions, there may be cases in which a design symbol in which characters, arithmetic symbols and the like are written in addition to numbers is included in the symbol sequence. Such a symbol sequence is variably displayed so as to flow (scroll) in the vertical direction in the left region, middle region, and right region on the screen.

  Here, with regard to the change display effect and stop display effect using specific effect designs, examples of basic effects for each change employed in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. First, a variable display effect that does not include an effect (hereinafter referred to as a roaring effect) such that the effect symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed again during the variable display effect by the effect symbol will be described as a normal variable display effect. Next, the variable display effect including the above-mentioned turning effect will be described as a special variable display effect with a typical example (FIGS. 48 to 60). It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to these examples, and other special variation display effects including a number of turn effects can be applied.

[Normal variation display effect at special symbol big hit (Example 1)]
FIG. 40 is a continuous diagram illustrating a first normal variation display effect example (hereinafter referred to as a first effect example) corresponding to the special symbol change display and stop display. In the first effect example, an effect example that is a big hit through the normal reach effect is shown. In addition, here, an example of a change display effect and a stop display effect performed using the effect symbol is shown for the variation of the special symbol at the time of winning. This variable display effect corresponds to a series of effects performed from when the special symbol starts variable display until it is stopped and displayed (including fixed stop). The stop display effect is an effect that represents that the special symbol is stopped and displayed and the result of the internal lottery at that time is a combination of the effect symbols. Here, before explaining the specific contents of the control processing, the basic flow of the change display effect and stop display effect for each change employed in the present embodiment will be described.

[Variable display production start]
In FIG. 40 (A): In synchronization with the start of the variation of the special symbol, the variation display effect is started when the three effect symbols are scrolled and varied on the display screen of the dot matrix LED display 42. In the figure, the change display of the effect symbol is simply indicated by a downward arrow. In addition, although not shown here, for example, a mode in which a notice effect is performed by displaying an image of a character, an item, or the like on the display screen may be used. Although not specifically shown in the figure, for example, the fourth symbol may be displayed at the lower part of the screen of the dot matrix LED display 42. The fourth symbol is a “fourth effect symbol” that follows the left, middle, and right effect symbols, and is displayed in a synchronized manner during the change display of the effect symbol.

[Stop of left design]
In FIG. 40 (B): When a certain amount of time has elapsed since the start of the change of the special symbol, the left effect design first stops changing. In this example, the effect design representing the dot character “7” is stopped at the left position of the screen.

[Reach condition occurs]
In FIG. 40 (C): Furthermore, the right effect symbol stops changing, and at this time, the effect symbol representing the dot character “7” is also stopped at the right position of the screen, whereby a reach state occurs. At this time, the medium performance symbol is changing. It should be noted that until the right effect symbol stops changing, an effect regarding whether or not the right effect symbol stops at the effect symbol representing “7” (so-called tempering effect) may be executed.

  In general, when all three of the same type of effect symbols are stopped on the effect, it is “winning”, and here, the remaining one of the remaining effect symbols is stopped and displayed until “winning” is confirmed. Although not particularly illustrated, it may be an aspect in which character information such as “reach!” Is displayed on the display screen, and a sound is output together.

[Reach production]
In FIG. 40 (D): After the reach state occurs, the process until the last effect symbol (medium effect symbol) is stopped and displayed is expressed with various contents. In the example shown in the figure, an effect that the medium effect symbol moves while slowly scrolling is performed. Such an effect is intended to remind the player of the idea that “If the dot character of“ 7 ”stops at the end”, the player will continue to expect.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 40 (E): The last medium effect symbol stops substantially in synchronization with the special symbol stop display (not necessarily completely at the same time). In the illustrated example, the dot character “7” is stopped and displayed on the screen, and the left / middle / right effect symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner of hitting “7”-“7”-“7”. . In this way, when the effect symbol (special symbol) is stopped and displayed in a big hit manner, the operation of the variable winning device 30 is started.

[Normal variation display effect at special symbol big hit (Example 2)]
FIGS. 41 to 43 are continuous diagrams showing a second normal variation display effect example (hereinafter referred to as a second effect example) corresponding to the change display and stop display of special symbols. In the 2nd production example, the production example which becomes a big hit through a battle reach production is shown.

[Variable display production start]
In FIG. 41 (A): In synchronization with the start of the change of the special symbol, the change display effect is started when the three effect symbols scroll and change on the display screen of the dot matrix LED display 42.

[Stop of left design]
In FIG. 41 (B): When a certain amount of time has elapsed since the start of the change of the special symbol, the left effect design first stops changing. In this example, it is shown that the effect design representing the dot character “3” has stopped at the left position of the screen.

[Reach condition occurs]
41 (C): Furthermore, the right effect symbol stops changing, and at this time, the effect symbol representing “3” of the dot character is also stopped at the right position of the screen, so that the reach state occurs. At this time, the medium performance symbol is changing.

[Preliminary notice after reach occurs]
In FIG. 41 (D): Reach of content that immediately after the reach state occurs, an image of a female character (for example, an image representing a princess) is suddenly displayed on the screen so as to be split into a large image A notice effect will be performed after the occurrence. By causing an image of a female character to appear at such a timing, it is possible to obtain an effect of making the player have a sense of expectation that “may be a big hit”.

[Selecting a feature]
In FIG. 42, (E): After a reach state has occurred, character information “PUSH” is displayed on the screen. By executing such an effect, the player can be prompted to press the effect switching button 45.

[Moving effects]
In FIG. 42 (F): When the effect switch button 45 is pressed by the player, an effect that the movable accessory 60d rises to the center of the dot matrix LED display 42 is executed (movable accessory effect) ). By this effect moving effect, it is possible to teach that the effect related to the movable character 60d is developed in the subsequent reach effect.

[Battle Reach Production]
In FIG. 42 (G): The reach state continues even after the post-reach notice effect is executed, and after that, it develops into a battle reach effect. In the illustrated example, there is an effect that an image of a character “VS” appears in the center of the screen. Thereby, it can be taught to the player that the battle reach effect will be started. It should be noted that the effect design may continue to be variably displayed in a reduced state near the four corners of the screen.

  In FIG. 42 (H): When the battle reach effect is started, an image of the opponent (enemy) is initially displayed. Various characters are prepared as opponents appearing in the battle reach production, but in the example shown in the figure, an image of a “cat ghost” embodying the soul of an animal is displayed. After that, for example, an effect is performed in which the “cat ghost” delivers its own special technique.

  In FIG. 43, (I): When the battle reach production progresses, an image of a male soldier (a soldier character) is displayed. This soldier's character is displayed in the form of possessing the weapon (axe) selected in the preceding feature selection effect. After that, an effect of fighting “cat ghost” is executed using the displayed weapon. Note that weak points are set in advance for the opponents appearing in the battle reach production, and the degree of victory expectation (hit expectation) differs depending on the selected weapon.

  In FIG. 43 (J): When proceeding to the final stage of the battle reach production, the “cat ghost” and the “soldier character” mutually perform their special moves, and the production in which an explosion occurs on the screen is executed. In this state, if the “cat ghost” wins, it will be out of place, and if the “Soldier character” wins, it will be a win. Therefore, this situation is the final stage of battle reach production, and is the most exciting part as a game. For this reason, a cut-in advance notice or a helper appearance notice that another “soldier character” may help at this time may be simultaneously performed in this scene.

  In FIG. 43 (K): “Soldier character” is displayed large, and when an image in which one arm is pushed upward is displayed, it is a big hit (winning). Thereby, it is possible to make the player feel the reverberation that “the cat's ghost has been ridden”, and to improve the player's satisfaction. Note that “Cat's ghost” is displayed large when not winning (when lost).

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 43 (L): A stop display effect as an effect symbol is performed substantially in synchronism with the final display of the special symbol (symbol effect execution means). The stop display effect of the effect symbol is performed, for example, in a state where the left, middle and right effect symbols are restored to their initial sizes. By performing such a stop display effect, it is possible to teach the player that the big hit has been finalized.

  If the result of the internal lottery is non-winning, the special symbol is stopped and displayed with the off symbol, so that the effect symbol is similarly displayed with a stop display effect in the manner of deviation (symbol effect executing means). In this case, by displaying “2” or “4”, which is a number other than “3”, in the middle of the screen, unfortunately, an effect is given to inform the player that the change has not been a big hit. Is called. Such an effect is executed as an “out of reach reach effect”.

[Director during big role]
FIG. 44 is a continuous diagram partially showing an example of a big-bill effect performed during a big hit game when “16 round big hit” is true.

[At the start of one round]
44 (A): When the first round of jackpot game is started, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND1” is displayed on the screen. In addition, for example, an effect image unique to the jackpot game (for example, an image of a male character, a female character, etc.), character information of “V”, or the like may be displayed.

[16 rounds]
In FIG. 44 (B): After this, the big hit game proceeds smoothly and shifts to the final 16 rounds. At this time, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND16” is displayed on the screen. In the case of performing a promotion role during a big game during a big hit game, the promotion effect is executed in an arbitrary round.

[At the end of a major role, high probability state disclosure effect]
In FIG. 44 (C): At the timing when the big hit game is ended (during the end process), the big end effect of the content teaching the mode to be transferred thereafter is executed. In the illustrated example, the example corresponds to “16 round symbol 1” and the probability state designation value is “1”. In this case, character information “rush mode” is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big game end effect, it is possible to clearly disclose to the player that the bonus will be shifted to the “high probability state” and “time reduction state” as a bonus after the end of the big hit game (high probability State disclosure effect execution means).

[Example of normal fluctuation display in rush mode]
FIG. 45 is a continuous diagram showing an example of a normal variation display effect in the rush mode. This rush mode corresponds to “16 round symbol 1”, corresponds to “16 round symbol 2” after the end of the big hit game when the probability state designation value is set to “1”, and This is a mode that is transitioned to when the probability state designation value is set to “1” and 50 fluctuations have elapsed after the end of the jackpot game, and is set to “high probability state” and “time reduction state”. Applicable. The rush mode is a mode in which it is clearly disclosed to the player that the winning probability of the special symbol is in a high probability state. Hereinafter, the flow of production will be described in order.

  45 (A): For example, by performing the first variation display after the end of the big hit game, the variation display of the effect symbol is performed in the “rush mode” state.

  In FIG. 45 (B): Since the first change (when not winning) after the end of the big hit game, all effect symbols are stopped and displayed ("1"-"1"-"5 "). In “Rush Mode”, in order to achieve high-speed digestion of symbol variations, a relatively short variation time (for example, a variation time of about 1.5 seconds or 3.0 seconds) is set for the variation time when not winning. Has been. For this reason, regarding the effect display variation display effect, all effect symbols are stopped and displayed at the same time.

  (C) in FIG. 45: When the next fluctuation is started, the second fluctuation display is performed after the big hit game ends. This “rush mode” is continued until the next jackpot is won (actually, it is limited to 10,000 fluctuations, but the rush mode will continue to be further probabilistically very low). In addition, since the “rush mode” is a time shortening state, the variable start winning device 28 is frequently operated, and unless the game ball launch is stopped, the variation of the effect symbol accompanying the variation display of the second special symbol Display will be performed.

[Example of pre-reading effects during rush mode (part 1)]
FIG. 46 is a continuous diagram showing a prefetch effect example (part 1) during the rush mode. Hereinafter, the flow of production will be described in order. Here, an example will be described in which continuous prefetch effects are executed using four lottery elements. In the following example, an example in which a lottery element of “winning” or “non-winning” is stored in the change after four changes is shown.

[Before the third change]
46 (A): For example, the stop display effect of the effect symbol is performed in a state where the game in the rush mode has progressed to some extent ("7"-"7"-"4"). In the example shown in the figure, a continuous prefetch effect is started from this variation. In this case, in order to teach the player not only the visual information but also the auditory information that the continuous pre-reading effect is started, the effect of outputting the pre-reading fluctuation stop sound is executed. More specifically, when the effect symbol is stopped and displayed, the first pre-reading fluctuation stop sound (for example, “Pui”) is output from the speakers 54, 55, and 56 (reference numeral Y1).

[Before two fluctuations]
In FIG. 46 (B): The stop display effect of the effect symbol is performed following the previous non-winning stop display effect (“7”-“7”-“5”). Here again, the effect of outputting the pre-change fluctuation stop sound is executed. More specifically, a second stop pre-reading stop sound (for example, “Pupui”) is output from the speakers 54, 55, and 56 (reference symbol Y2) when the effect symbol is stopped and displayed.

[1 change before the change]
In FIG. 46, (C): The stop display effect of the effect symbol is performed following the previous non-winning stop display effect ("7"-"7"-"6"). Here again, the effect of outputting the pre-change fluctuation stop sound is executed. More specifically, when the effect symbol is stopped and displayed, the third pre-reading fluctuation stop sound (for example, “Puppy”) is output from the speakers 54, 55, and 56 (reference symbol Y3).

[Changes (when elected)]
In FIG. 46, (D): When the change corresponds to winning, a stop display effect of the effect symbols is performed according to the winning mode following the previous non-winning stop display effect ("7"-"7 "-" 7 "). In the “rush mode”, in order to realize high-speed digestion of symbol variations, a relatively short variation time (for example, a variation time of about 1.5 seconds or 3.0 seconds) is set for the variation time at the time of winning (However, this is not the case when the re-drawing effect described later is executed). As the last pre-reading variation stop sound, a different kind of sound effect (for example, “Jakine”) is output from the speakers 54, 55, and 56 (reference symbol Y4).

[Changes (when not elected)]
46 (E): On the other hand, when the change corresponds to non-winning, the stop display effect of the effect symbol is performed according to the non-winning mode following the previous non-winning stop display effect (“7 "-" 4 "-" 2 "). If the final change is a non-winning, all the effect symbols are displayed in a stopped state (separated pattern).

  Thus, according to the present embodiment, if the winning aspect of “7”-“7”-“7” is set as the final goal for the stop pattern of the effect symbol, the stop pattern of the effect symbol is set toward the final goal. You can adjust. That is, in the example shown in the figure, the final winning mode is “7”-“7”-“7”, so that “1” before the change is “7”-“7”-“6”, and before the second change Is “7”-“7”-“6”, and can be “7”-“7”-“4” before the third change. Thereby, the count-up effect using the effect symbol can be executed.

  In the illustrated example, the count-up effect is described as an example, but the count-down effect can also be executed. In this case, for example, if the final winning mode is “5”-“5”-“5”, then “5”-“5”-“6” before the first change and “2” before the second change “5”-“5”-“7” or the like.

  In addition, in the example shown in the figure, the example is described in which the left effect symbol and the middle effect symbol are fixed and the count-up effect is performed, but the left effect symbol is fixed and the middle effect symbol and the right effect symbol are displayed. It may be counted up. Specifically, if the final winning mode is “7”-“7”-“7”, then “7”-“6”-“6” before the first change and “2” before the second change 7 "-" 5 "-" 5 "etc. The same applies to the countdown effect.

  As described above, the winning effect is executed without performing the reach effect in the rush mode. However, in the modes other than the rush mode, each reach effect (normal reach effect, battle reach) described above is executed. Production etc.) are executed.

[Example of pre-reading effects during rush mode (part 2)]
FIG. 47 is a continuous diagram showing a prefetch effect example (part 2) in the rush mode. Hereinafter, the flow of production will be described in order. Here, an example will be described in which a continuous prefetch effect is executed using three lottery elements, and then a re-lottery effect is executed.

Here, the “re-lottery effect” means that the effect symbol is temporarily stopped in a temporary winning mode (for example, “5”-“5”-“5”) in which the effect symbols having the same array image (numerical image) are temporarily arranged. Then, after all the effect symbols are changed again, the final winning mode (for example, “7”-“7”-“7” in which the effect symbols having the same or different arrangement images from the temporary winning mode are arranged. ) Is the effect of finally stopping the effect symbol.
In this case, at the stage where the effect symbol is temporarily stopped by the temporary winning mode (for example, “5”-“5”-“5”), the special symbol is in a changing state, and the final winning mode (for example, “7”- When the effect symbol is finally stopped by “7” − “7”), the variation of the special symbol is finished.

[Before two fluctuations]
47 (A): For example, the stop display effect of the effect symbol is performed in a state where the game in the rush mode has progressed to some extent (“5” − “5” − “3”). In the example shown in the figure, a continuous prefetch effect is started from this variation. Note that the illustration of the variable stop sound during prefetching is omitted.

[1 change before the change]
In FIG. 47 (B): The stop display effect of the effect symbol is performed (“5” − “5” − “4”) following the previous non-winning stop display effect.

[Changes (when elected)]
47 (C): When the change corresponds to winning, the temporary winning effect of the effect symbol is performed following the previous non-winning stop display effect ("5"-"5"-"5 "). Here, the winning mode is a temporary winning mode in which the effect symbols of “5” are provisionally arranged.

[Re-lottery production (re-lottery production execution means)]
In FIG. 47 (D): After the temporary winning effect of the effect symbol, the effect display effect is again displayed (“5”-“5”-“5” to “6”-“6”). -"6").

  In FIG. 47 (E): The re-lottery effect is continuously executed, and the re-change effect of the effect symbol is continuously performed (from “6”-“6”-“6” to “7” "-" 7 "-" 7 ").

[Final stop]
In FIG. 47 (F): When the re-variation effect is finished, the final effect symbol stop display effect is performed ("7"-"7"-"7"). Here, the winning mode is the final winning mode in which the production symbols of “7” are arranged.

  As described above, in this embodiment, a re-lottery effect may be executed. However, when the re-lottery effect is executed, there is a possibility that an effect symbol different from the winning mode that was temporarily stopped may be finally stopped and displayed. Therefore, the player's expectation can be improved. In this case, the count-up effect or the count-down effect proceeds with the provisional winning mode (“5”-“5”-“5”) as a target.

  Next, the variable display effect including the tempering effect will be described as a typical example of the special variable display effect. In general, when three productions of the same type are stopped in a production (for example, “7”-“7”-“7”), it is “hit”, and two productions are stopped together (for example, “ 7 "-" Fluctuating "-" 7 "), it indicates that a temporary state (reach state) has occurred. In order to provide the player with an interest in whether or not to enter the tempering state (reach state), a so-called tempering effect is performed on the display screen of the dot matrix LED display 42 using an effect design, a character image, or the like. (Special variation display effect execution means).

[Special variation display effect (Example 1)]
48 to 51 are continuous diagrams showing examples of the first special variation display effect corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol. In the examples after this, the roaring effect is included in the variable display effect by the above-mentioned effect symbol. In addition, here, the roaring effect by the effect design etc. is demonstrated concretely, For example, since the effect after the reach effect etc. is the same as the normal fluctuation display effect which does not include the above roaring effect, description is abbreviate | omitted. That is, here, a description will be given of the roaring effect that is performed from the time when the variation display of the effect symbol is started to the time before the reach effect is started.

  48 (A): For example, in synchronization with the start of the change of the special symbol, the variable display effect is started by scrolling the three symbol lines of the effect symbol on the display screen of the dot matrix LED display 42. (Design effect execution means). That is, in synchronization with the start of the change of the special symbol, the display of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol is scrolled (flowed) in the vertical direction in the display screen of the dot matrix LED display 42 so as to change the display. Production begins.

  48B: After a certain amount of time has elapsed, in the left area in the display screen, the left effect symbol in which “1” is written from the left effect symbol in which the numeral “0” is slowly written as dot characters. The state of scrolling to is displayed.

[Stop of left design]
(C) in FIG. 48: Thereafter, the left effect symbol first stops changing in the left region in the display screen. In this example, the left effect symbol in which the numeral “1” is represented by dot characters is stopped. In the right area of the display screen, the state of slowly scrolling from the right effect design in which the numeral “0” is written in dot characters to the right effect design in which “1” is shown is displayed. . Therefore, if the right effect symbol in which the numeral “1” is represented by dot characters is stopped, the reach state (tempe state) is indicated.

[Right production symbol stop, reach state occurrence, squeak production start]
(D) in FIG. 48: Thereafter, the right effect design in which the numeral “1” is written as a dot character in the right region in the display screen stops changing. Therefore, it represents that the reach state of the number “1” − “being changed” − “1” is generated with dot characters in the display screen.

[Left variation of left effect design]
(E) in FIG. 48: Immediately thereafter, a variable display effect of the left effect symbol is started in the left region in the display screen. As for the variable display effect of the left effect symbol, there is a variable display effect in which the effect symbol in which the numeral “1” is indicated by the dot character in the stopped state is changed to the effect symbol in which the numeral “2” is indicated. Done. Therefore, it represents that the reach state of the number “1” — “being changed” — “1” with the dot character established earlier in the display screen has been resolved.

[Stop of left design]
FIG. 49 (F): Thereafter, the left effect design in which the number “2” is written as a dot character in the left region in the display screen stops changing. Therefore, in the display screen, the dot character “2” — “being changed” — “1” indicates that it is one step before the break state.

[Right change of the design of the right production, chase production]
In FIG. 49 (G): Immediately thereafter, a change display effect of the right effect symbol is started in the right region in the display screen. As for the change display effect of the right effect design, there is a change display effect of changing from the effect design in which the numeral “1” is written with the dot characters in the stopped state to the effect design in which the number “2” is written. Done. That is, when the representation of the left effect symbol is changed to the number “2” by the dot character, an effect is performed in which the right effect symbol represented by the numeral “2” follows the number “2”.

(Right production symbol stops, reach condition occurs)
In FIG. 49 (H): Thereafter, the right effect design in which the number “2” is written as a dot character in the right region in the display screen stops changing. Therefore, it represents that the reach state of the number “2” − “being changed” − “2” in the dot character has occurred again in the display screen.

(Stop after re-changing the left effect design, reach condition occurs)
49 (I): After that, as a result of the change display effect of the left effect symbol in the left area in the display screen, the number “3” is obtained from the effect symbol in which the numeral “2” is indicated by dot characters. It is changed to the described design. This variable display effect is the same effect as the variable display effect that is changed from the left effect symbol in which the numeral “1” is written in the dot character to the left effect symbol in which the numeral “2” is written. is there.

[Right effect design stops after re-variation, reach condition occurs, chase effect]
In FIG. 49 (J): After that, as a result of performing the change display effect of the right effect design in the right area in the display screen, the number “3” is obtained from the effect design in which the number “2” is represented by dot characters. It is changed to the described design. Although not shown in the drawing, this variable display effect is a variable display that is changed from the right effect symbol in which the number “1” is written in the dot character to the right effect symbol in which the number “2” is written. The production is similar to the production. Therefore, it represents that the reach state “3” − “being changed” − “3” of the dot character in the display screen has occurred again. In this case, an effect is also performed in which the right effect symbol follows the change of the left effect symbol.

[Left effect stop after re-variation, right effect stop after re-change, generation of reach, chase effect]
In FIG. 50 (K): After that, as a result of performing the variable display effect of the left effect symbol in the left area in the display screen, the number “4” is obtained from the effect symbol in which the numeral “3” is indicated by dot characters. It is changed to the described design. Similarly, as a result of the change display effect of the right effect design being performed in the right region in the display screen, the effect of expressing the number “4” from the effect design in which the number “3” is indicated by dot characters. It is changed to a design. Although not shown, in the same manner as described above, these variable display effects are first performed in the left region with the variable effect of the left effect, and then the variable effect of the right effect is performed. Therefore, in the display screen, it is assumed that the combination of “4”-“being changed”-“3” is temporarily stopped from the reach state of “3”-“being changed”-“3” with the dot character “ It represents that the reach state “4”-“Fluctuating”-“4” has occurred again. In this case, an effect is also performed in which the right effect symbol follows the change of the left effect symbol.

[Left effect stop after re-variation, right effect stop after re-change, generation of reach, chase effect]
In FIG. 50 (L): After that, as a result of performing the variable display effect of the left effect symbol in the left area in the display screen, the number “5” is obtained from the effect symbol in which the numeral “4” is indicated by dot characters. It is changed to the described design. Similarly, as a result of the change display effect of the right effect design being performed in the right area of the display screen, the effect of expressing the number “5” from the effect design in which the number “4” is indicated by dot characters. It is changed to a design. In addition, although not shown here, as in the above, these variable display effects are first subjected to the variable effect effect of the left effect symbol in the left region, and then the variable effect effect of the right effect symbol is performed. Therefore, on the display screen, it is assumed that the combination of “5”-“being changed”-“4” is temporarily stopped from the reach state such as the dot character “4”-“being changed”-“4”. This indicates that the reach state “5”-“fluctuating”-“5” has occurred again. In this case, an effect is also performed in which the right effect symbol follows the change of the left effect symbol.

[Finished production end, reach announcement notice]
In FIG. 50 (M): After that, all of the effect symbols in the reach state such as the numbers “5”-“being changed”-“5” in the display screen are erased, and the characters “reach” are displayed. Reach occurrence notice effect is executed. That is, it represents that the reach state is determined by the combination of “5” − “being changed” − “5”. In addition, an effect of outputting sound such as “reach” is performed. Note that, after this, a reach effect is performed in the display screen, but the description is omitted.

  Here, in the continuous diagrams from (K) in FIG. 50 to (M) in FIG. 50, the case where the turn effect is followed by the reach effect has been described. This is, for example, in the change pattern determination process (step S2405) at the time of loss. It is assumed that the fluctuation pattern number 8 (the deviation fluctuation pattern 8 after reach) is selected. On the other hand, there is a case where it does not follow the reach production from the talk production. For example, it is assumed that the variation pattern number 5 (non-reach variation pattern 5) is selected in the variation pattern determination process (step S2405) at the time of loss and the reach effect is not executed. Hereinafter, description will be made with reference to a continuous diagram shown in FIG.

  51 (K): Similar to (K) in FIG. 50, the reach state such as “4”-“changing”-“4” of dot characters in the display screen is generated again. ing.

[End of the production effect, stop after re-changing the left effect design]
In FIG. 51, (N): As a result of performing the variation display effect of the left effect symbol in the left area in the display screen, the number “5” is obtained from the effect symbol in which the numeral “4” is indicated by dot characters. It is changed to the described design. At this time, in the right region in the display screen, the right effect design in which the numeral “4” is written as dot characters remains stopped.

[Intermediate design stop, change end]
In FIG. 51 (O): Thereafter, the medium effect design in which the numeral “5” is written as dot characters in the middle area of the display screen stops changing. Therefore, the combination of effect symbols is dot letters and the numbers “5”-“5”-“4”, and it is displayed on the effect that the current lottery result was not won (missed). .

  In this way, the player can be given a sense of expectation as to whether or not the tempering state (reach state) is likely to occur due to the roaring effect.

[(3) Special fluctuation display effect (example 2)]
52 and 53 are continuous diagrams showing an example of the second special variation display effect corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol.

(Left effect symbol stop, whispering effect start)
52A: For example, when a certain amount of time has elapsed since the start of the variation of the special symbol, the variation of the left effect symbol first stops in the left region in the display screen of the dot matrix LED display 42. In this example, the left effect symbol in which the numeral “7” is written as dot characters is stopped.

[Right production design stop, ghost grab production]
(B) in FIG. 52: Thereafter, the right effect design in which the number “3” is written as a dot character in the right region in the display screen stops changing. At this time, the character “ghost” appears in the display screen, and the character “ghost” is displayed so as to cover the number “3” with dot characters. That is, the effect that the “ghost” of the character has stopped the right effect design that is scrolling is performed. At this time, in the left area in the display screen, the left effect symbol with the numeral “7” remains stopped, and the middle effect symbol is continuously scrolled in the middle region. .

[Right production design stop, ghost grab production]
(C) in FIG. 52: After that, the right effect design in which the number “4” is written as a dot character in the right region in the display screen stops changing. At this time, the character “ghost” is displayed so as to cover the number “4” with dot characters. That is, this time, the effect that the character “ghost” has stopped the right effect design with the dot character “4”.

[Right production design stop, ghost grab production]
In FIG. 52 (D) to FIG. 53 (F): Thereafter, the right effect design repeatedly fluctuates and stops in the right region in the display screen, and the numbers represented by dot characters are “5”, “6”, “7”. When the change is made, the right effect design stops changing. At this time, the character “ghost” is displayed so as to cover the numbers “5”, “6”, and “7” by the dot characters at the same time. That is, an effect is performed in which the character “ghost” stops the right effect design in order.

[Reach condition occurs]
In FIG. 53 (G): After that, the character “ghost” is erased from the display screen, and the change of the right effect design in the right area is not started, and the number “7” is written in dot characters. The production symbol remains stopped. As a result, it is represented that a reach state is formed which is a combination of the numbers “7”-“being changed”-“7” with dot characters.

[Finished production end, reach announcement notice]
In FIG. 53 (H): After that, all the effect symbols in the reach state such as the numbers “7”-“being changed”-“7” in the display screen are erased, and the characters “reach” are displayed. Reach occurrence notice effect is executed. In addition, an effect of outputting sound such as “reach” is performed. Note that, after this, a reach effect is performed in the display screen, but the description is omitted.

  Note that, similarly to the above (2) special variation display effect (example 1), it is also assumed that a variation pattern in which the reach effect is not executed is selected. In that case, although not shown, for example, at the same time as the right effect design in which the number “6” is written as a dot character in the right area is stopped, the effect that the character “ghost” moves out of the display screen is performed. A roaring effect that does not result in a tempered state is also performed.

[(4) Special variation display effect (example 3)]
FIG. 54 is a continuous diagram showing an example of the third special variation display effect corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol.

[Left / Right production symbol stop]
54A: For example, when a certain amount of time has elapsed since the start of the variation of the special symbol, the left effect symbol first stops varying in the left region within the display screen of the dot matrix LED display 42, and then the right region. The right effect design also stops changing. In this example, the left effect design in which the numeral “4” is written as dot characters has stopped, and the right effect design in which the number “5” is written has stopped thereafter.

[Intermediate design stop]
(B) in FIG. 54: Thereafter, the medium effect design in which the numeral “4” is written as dot characters in the middle area in the display screen stops changing. Therefore, the display screen indicates that the dot is in the state of “4”-“4”-“5”.

[Change of middle / right production design, start of production production, production production]
54 (C): After that, an effect that makes it appear that the medium effect symbol moves to the right side of the screen and pushes the right effect symbol out of the display screen in the display screen is started. Specifically, the number “4” is moved to the right by the dot character displayed in the middle area in the display screen, and then the two numbers “4” are accompanied by the number “5” displayed in the right area. "And" 5 "appear to move to the right. Therefore, the number “4” in the middle area is the number “5” in the right area and the number “5” in the right area is removed from the display screen, and the number “4” is moved to the right area. Even if “5” remains in the screen display, an effect that makes it appear as if numbers and numbers are pressing is performed. At this time, in the left area in the display screen, the left effect design in which the numeral “4” is written as dot characters remains stopped.

[Reach condition occurs]
54 (D): After that, the number “4” in the middle area dot character succeeds in removing the number “5” in the right area from the display screen. An effect that appears to have moved to the right area is performed. Therefore, the effect design in which the number “4” is written as dot characters in the right area in the display screen stops. As a result, it is represented that a reach state is generated that is a combination of the numbers “4”-“blank”-“4” with dot characters.

[Finished production end, reach announcement notice]
In FIG. 54, (E): After that, in the display screen, the design symbols in the reach state such as the numbers “4”-“blank”-“4” are erased with dot characters, and the reach where characters such as “reach” are displayed. The occurrence notice effect is executed. In addition, an effect of outputting sound such as “reach” is performed. Note that, after this, a reach effect is performed in the display screen, but the description is omitted.

  Similarly to the above-described example of the special variation display effect, although not shown, when a variation pattern in which the reach effect is not executed is selected, the number “4” in the middle region and the number “5” in the right region are selected. As a result of the pressing, the number “4” does not push out the number “5”, and the number “5” remains in the screen display.

[(5) Special variation display effect (example 4)]
FIG.55 and FIG.56 is a continuous figure which shows the example of the 4th special fluctuation display effect matched with the fluctuation display of the special symbol.

[Left effect symbol stop]
55A: For example, when a certain amount of time has elapsed since the start of the variation of the special symbol, the variation of the left effect symbol first stops in the left region in the display screen of the dot matrix LED display 42. In this example, the left effect design in which the numeral “3” is represented by dot characters is stopped.

[Right stop design stop]
(B) in FIG. 55: Thereafter, the right effect design in which the numeral “8” is written as a dot character in the right region in the display screen stops changing. Therefore, the display screen indicates that the number “3” — “being changed” — “8”, which is a dot character, is one step before the break state.

[Intermediate design stop, whispering production start, addition production]
(C) in FIG. 55: Thereafter, the medium effect design in which the symbol character “+” is written in the middle area in the display screen stops changing. Therefore, in the display screen, it represents that it has stopped by the combination of effect symbols, such as “3”-“+”-“8”, which are dot characters and numbers and symbol characters.

[Changes in all production patterns]
(D) in FIG. 55: After that, an effect that makes it appear that all effect symbols (left, middle, and right effect symbols) move to the left side of the screen in the display screen is started. Specifically, an effect that makes it appear that the combination of “3”-“+”-“8” moves to the left is performed. Furthermore, an effect such that the symbol character “=” appears from the right side of the screen is performed.

  56 (E): The effect that the effect symbol moves to the left side of the screen is continuously performed. Furthermore, an effect such that the numbers “1” and “1” appear as dot characters from the right side of the screen is performed. Therefore, this series of effects represents that “3 + 8 = 11”, which is the addition of four arithmetic operations, was displayed on the display screen.

[Reach condition occurs]
56F: After that, the effect of moving the display of characters such as “3 + 8 = 11” from the right side to the left side in the display screen is finished, and the effect that the number “1” is written as a dot character in the left area. The design stops, and the effect design in which the number “1” is written as a dot character in the right area stops. As a result, it is indicated that a reach state composed of a combination of “1”-“blank”-“1” has occurred.

[Finished production end, reach announcement notice]
In FIG. 56 (G): After that, in the display screen, the design symbols in the reach state such as the numbers “1”-“blank”-“1” are erased with dot characters, and the reach where characters such as “reach” are displayed. The occurrence notice effect is executed. In addition, an effect of outputting sound such as “reach” is performed. Note that, after this, a reach effect is performed in the display screen, but the description is omitted.

  Here, in the same way as described above, there is a case in which the production is not followed by the reach production. In that case, although not shown, for example, the effect of moving the display of characters such as “3 + 8 = 11” from the right side to the left side in the display screen is finished, and the effect that the number “1” is written in the left area as a dot character The drawing stops, the effect design with the number “1” in the middle area stops, and then the effect design with the number “2” in the right area stops, and this lottery result is not It may be displayed on the effect that it has been won (lost). That is, the number “1” stops in the left area and moves to the middle area with the expectation that it may become a tempering state, and the left effect symbol and the right effect symbol are not in the tempering state. Is done.

[(6) Special variation display effect (example 5)]
57 and 58 are continuous diagrams showing an example of the fifth special variation display effect corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol.

[Stop of left design]
57A: For example, when a certain amount of time has elapsed since the start of the variation of the special symbol, the variation of the left effect symbol first stops in the left region in the display screen of the dot matrix LED display 42. In this example, the left effect symbol in which the numeral “7” is written as dot characters is stopped.

[Right stop design stop]
(B) in FIG. 57: Thereafter, the right effect design in which the numeral “1” is written as a dot character in the right region in the display screen stops changing. Therefore, the display screen indicates that the dot character is the number “7” − “changing” − “1”, which is one step before the break state.

[Intermediate design stop]
(C) in FIG. 57: Thereafter, the medium effect design in which the numeral “1” is written as dot characters in the middle area in the display screen stops changing. Therefore, this indicates that the display screen is in the state of a break such as “7”-“1”-“1” in the form of dot characters.

[Changes in all production patterns, start of production production, multiplication production]
In FIG. 57 (D): After that, an effect that the symbol character “x” appears in the display screen is performed. Further, at that time, an effect is given in which the horizontal width of the number combination “7”-“1”-“1” is reduced by the dot characters displayed in the display screen. Therefore, “7 × 11” of multiplication of four arithmetic operations is displayed on the display screen.

  (E) in FIG. 58: After that, an effect that “7 × 11” displayed in the display screen moves to the left side is performed. Furthermore, an effect that the character “= 7” continues to appear from the right side is performed. As a result, characters such as “7 × 11 = 7” are displayed in the display screen, and it is expected that “7” will be displayed after that.

  (F) in FIG. 58: After that, an effect that “7 × 11 = 7” displayed in the display screen moves to the left side is performed. Furthermore, an effect is produced in which the number “7” in dot characters continues to appear from the right side. As a result, characters such as “7 × 11 = 77” are displayed in the display screen.

[Reach condition occurs]
58 (G): After that, the effect of moving the display of characters such as “7 × 11 = 77” from the right side to the left side in the display screen is finished, and the number “7” is written in the left area as a dot character. The effect symbol is stopped, and the effect symbol with the number “7” in the right area is stopped. As a result, it is indicated that a reach state composed of a combination of “7”-“blank”-“7” has occurred.

[Finished production end, reach announcement notice]
In FIG. 58 (H): Thereafter, all the design symbols in the reach state such as the numbers “7”-“blank”-“7” in the display screen are erased, and the characters “reach” are displayed. Reach occurrence notice effect is executed. In addition, an effect of outputting sound such as “reach” is performed. Note that, after this, a reach effect is performed in the display screen, but the description is omitted.

[(7) Special variation display effect (Example 6)]
59 and 60 are continuous diagrams showing examples of the sixth special variation display effect corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol.

[Left / Right production symbol stop]
59A: For example, when a certain amount of time has elapsed since the start of the variation of the special symbol, the left effect symbol first stops varying in the left region in the display screen of the dot matrix LED display 42, and then the right region. The right effect design also stops changing. In this example, the left effect design in which the numeral “0” is written in dot characters is stopped, and the right effect design in which the number “4” is written is then stopped.

[Intermediate design stop]
(B) in FIG. 59: Thereafter, the right effect design in which the numeral “2” is written as a dot character in the middle area in the display screen stops changing. Therefore, in the display screen, it represents that it has stopped by the combination of effect symbols, such as the number "0"-"2"-"4" by the dot character.

[Display screen change production, start of production production]
(C) in FIG. 59: Immediately after that, in the display screen, the display screen changes such that the middle point “•” is displayed as a dot character between the four numbers and the numbers on the upper and lower sections, respectively. Is done. Specifically, the display screen that was displayed with a combination of stylized symbols such as numbers “0”-“2”-“4” in dot letters is “0 · 0 · 1 · 2” in the upper row and the lower row. In addition, an effect of changing to a display screen displayed by a combination of a number and a middle point such as “2, 3, 4, 4” is performed. At that time, the size of each numerical character is changed to be small so as to be within the display screen.

[Roulette production start]
(D) in FIG. 59: After that, an effect is produced in which the brightness of the display of “0 · 0” is reversed in the upper part of the display screen. For example, in the display of “0 • 0”, the LED of the dot portion where the number “0” or the middle point “•” is displayed is lit (red (black in the drawing)) and the other dot portions ( The LED that is off (black (white in the drawing)) for the LEDs other than the number and the middle point is a dot part that displays the number “0” and the middle point “•” by reversing the brightness. LED is turned off (black (white on the drawing)), and the LED of the other dot portions is turned on (red (black on the drawing)).

[Roulette production]
(E) in FIG. 59: After that, an effect is produced in which the brightness of the display of “0 · 1” is reversed in the upper part of the display screen. Immediately before that, an effect is performed in which the display of “0 · 0”, in which the light and darkness has been reversed last time, is reversed again and again, that is, the effect that the display is returned to before the reversal. Therefore, for the display portion of “0 · 1”, the LED of the dot portion that displays the numbers “0” and “1” and the middle point “·” with the dot character is turned off (black (white in the drawing)). The LEDs of other dot portions are lit (red (black in the drawing)).

[Roulette production]
(F) in FIG. 60: After that, similarly, an effect is produced in which the brightness of the display of “1 · 2” is reversed in the upper part of the display screen. Similarly, immediately before that, an effect that the display of “0 · 1”, in which the light and darkness has been reversed last time, is reversed again and again, that is, the effect that the display is returned to before the reversal is performed. Therefore, for the display portion of “1, 2”, the LED of the dot portion that displays the numbers “1”, “2” and “•” of the middle point is turned off (black (white in the drawing)). The LEDs of other dot portions are lit (red (black in the drawing)).

[Roulette production]
In FIG. 60 (G): After that, next, an effect is produced in which the brightness of the display of “2 · 3” is reversed in the lower part of the display screen. Immediately before that, an effect is performed in which the display of “0 · 1” in the upper stage where the light and darkness has been reversed last time is reversed again, that is, the effect is returned to before the reversal. Therefore, the LED of the dot portion that displays the numbers “2”, “3”, and the middle point “•” with the dot character is turned off (black (white on the drawing) )), And the LED of the other dot portions is turned on (red (black in the drawing)).

[Roulette production stop]
(H) in FIG. 60: After that, the part where the light and darkness is inverted is changed in order from left to right of the lower part of the display screen, from left to right of the upper part, and further to the lower part, and a certain amount of time has passed. Then, an effect is performed in which the light and darkness of the LED of the dot part “0 · 0” displayed on the upper stage in the display screen is stopped while being inverted. Although not specifically shown, it is a mode in which character information such as “PUSH” is displayed on the display screen, voice is output together, and the player is prompted to press the effect switch button 45. Also good.

[Display screen change effect, reach state occurrence]
(I) in FIG. 60: After that, the display screen that was displayed with a combination of numbers such as “0, 0, 1, 2” in the upper part and “2, 3, 4, 4” in the lower part and the middle point is displayed. In the left area of the display screen, the number “0” is displayed as a dot character, the middle area is not displayed (“blank”), and the right area is displayed in combination with the number “0”. Therefore, an effect is produced in which the display screen changes such that the display of the state “0 • 0” that has been stopped while the contrast of light and darkness has been reversed is greatly changed. As a result, it is represented that a reach state that is a combination of the numbers “0”-“blank”-“0” in dot characters has occurred. Note that, in the display screen, the middle effect symbol is not displayed in the middle region, and the “blank” middle effect symbol is stopped, but the scroll variation display is performed. May be displayed.

[Finished production end, reach announcement notice]
In FIG. 60 (J): After that, all the design symbols in the reach state such as the numbers “0”-“blank”-“0” in the display screen are erased, and the characters “reach” are displayed. Reach occurrence notice effect is executed. In addition, an effect of outputting sound such as “reach” is performed. Note that, after this, a reach effect is performed in the display screen, but the description is omitted.

  Next, an example of a control method for specifically realizing the above effects will be described. The above-described variation display effects (special variation display effects including normal variation display effects and turn effects), stop display effects, reach effects linked to this, advance notice effects before reach occurrence, advance notice effects after reach occurrence, look ahead effects, etc. Both are controlled through the following control process.

[Production control processing]
FIG. 61 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the effect control process executed by the effect control CPU 126. This effect control process is executed, for example, in a timer interrupt process (interrupt management process) separately from a reset start (main) process (not shown). The effect control CPU 126 generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined interrupt cycle (for example, a period of several tens of μs to several ms) during execution of the reset start process, and executes the timer interrupt process.

  The effect control process includes command reception process (step S400), working memory effect management process (step S401), destination determination effect management process (step S401a), effect symbol management process (step S402), display output process (step S404), This is a configuration including a subroutine group of a lamp driving process (step S406), an acoustic driving process (step S408), an effect random number update process (step S410), and other processes (step S412). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect control process will be described along each process.

  Step S400: In the command receiving process, the effect control CPU 126 receives an effect command transmitted from the main control CPU 72. The effect control CPU 126 analyzes the received commands and stores them in the command buffer area of the RAM 130 according to type. The command for the effect transmitted from the main control CPU 72 includes, for example, a special figure destination determination effect command, a (special symbol) effect command when the operating memory number increases, a (special symbol) effect command when the operating memory number decreases, a start port Winning sound control command, demonstration effect command, lottery result command, variation pattern command, variation start command, stop symbol command, symbol stop command, state designation command, round number command, error notification command, jackpot end effect command, number cut There are a counter value command, a variation pattern destination determination command, a main control mode status command, a probability state designation value command and the like.

  Step S401: In the action memory effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls turning on and off of the memory display lamp 59. The contents of the working memory effect management process will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

  Step S401a: The effect control CPU 126 executes a first determination effect management process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of determining whether or not to execute the prefetch effect, and determining the content of the effect when executing the effect. The specific processing content will be further described later using another flowchart.

  Step S402: In the effect symbol management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the variable display effect and the stop display effect using the effect symbols, and controls the effect contents during the opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 30. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects effect patterns of various notice effects (notice effect before reach occurrence, notice effect after reach occurrence, etc.). The contents of the effect symbol management process will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

  Step S404: In the display output process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) with basic control information of the effect contents (for example, the variable effect patterns of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively). Number, change notice notice number, prefetch notice effect pattern number, etc.). Thereby, the effect display control device 144 controls the display operation by the dot matrix LED display 42 based on the instructed effect content (effect executing means).

  Step S406: In the lamp driving process, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the lamp driving circuit 132. In response to this, the lamp drive circuit 132 drives (turns on or off, blinks, changes in luminance gradation, etc.) the various lamps 46 to 52, the panel lamp 53, the accessory lamp 57, and the like based on the control signal.

  Step S408: In the next sound drive process, the effect control CPU 126 gives the effect details to the sound drive circuit 134 (for example, BGM, audio data, pre-reading during the variable display effect, the reach effect, the mode transition effect, and the jackpot effect) Instructing a variable stop sound). Thereby, the sound according to the production content is output from the speakers 54, 55, and 56.

  Step S410: In the effect random number update process, the effect control CPU 126 updates various effect random numbers in the counter area of the RAM 130. The effect random number includes, for example, a random number used for a random number used for selection of a notice, a random effect pattern determination random number used when selecting a sound effect, an effect symbol combination pattern determination random number used when selecting a combination pattern of effect effects, and a redraw There are a production execution determination random number, a re-lottery production symbol combination pattern determination random number used at the time of selection of a combination pattern of production symbols during the re-lottery production. Note that the roaring effect pattern determination random number, the effect symbol combination pattern determination random number, the re-lottery effect execution determination random number, and the re-lottery effect symbol combination pattern determination random number are integers from 0 to 255 or 0 to 65535, for example.

  Step S412: In other processing, for example, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the accessory motors 58 of the movable accessory 60a-60d. The movable accessories 60a to 60d operate using the accessory motor 58 as a driving source, and produce an effect in synchronism with the display of the image by the dot matrix LED display 42 as described above or independently.

  Through the above-described effect control process, the effect control CPU 126 can comprehensively control the effect contents in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the contents of the action memory effect management process executed in the effect control process will be described.

[Working memory production management process]
FIG. 62 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the working memory effect management process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S700: First, the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the effect command at the time of increasing the number of working memories has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, and confirms whether or not the effect command at the time when the number of working memories increases is stored. When it is confirmed that the production command when the number of working memories increases is saved (step S700: Yes), the production control CPU 126 executes step S702. When it is not possible to confirm that the production command when the number of working memories increases is saved (step S700: No), the production control CPU 126 does not execute step S702.

  Step S702: The effect control CPU 126 executes an effect selection process when the number of working memories increases. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern (lighting pattern of the memory display lamp 59) for newly lighting the memory display lamp 59 corresponding to the display mode of storage of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

  Step S704: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the effect command at the time when the number of working memories decreases is received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the effect command when the number of working memories is reduced is stored. When it is confirmed that the production command when the number of working memories decreases is saved (step S704: Yes), the production control CPU 126 executes step S706. If it is not possible to confirm that the effect command when the number of working memories is reduced is stored (step S704: No), the effect control CPU 126 does not execute step S706.

Step S706: The effect control CPU 126 executes effect selection processing when the number of working memories decreases. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern (light-off pattern of the memory display lamp 59) that turns off the memory display lamp 59 corresponding to the display mode of the storage of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.
When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 61).

[Destination effect management process]
FIG. 63 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the above-described destination determination effect management process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S800: First, the effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the prefetch permission flag is ON. Here, the “prefetch permission flag” is a flag indicating whether or not the execution of the prefetch effect is permitted, and is stored in the RAM 130 (ON → permitted; OFF → nonpermitted). The matter to be checked with the prefetch permission flag is whether or not the prefetch effect contents are already held (set). Unlike the main control device 70, the effect control device 124 does not have a backup function, and therefore cannot maintain the contents of the RAM 130 when a situation where the power supply is interrupted occurs. Therefore, by checking the prefetch permission flag, it can be determined whether or not the prefetch effect can actually be executed. Note that the timing for turning on the prefetch permission flag is when the power is turned on (when the RAM 130 is cleared), after the end of the major role, or when the change corresponding to the non-winning is performed (the prefetching effect is executed and the winning is not met) Either after the change) is executed.

  As a result, if the prefetch permission flag is ON (step S800: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S802. On the other hand, if the prefetch permission flag is OFF (step S800: No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 61).

  Step S802: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the prefetch effect execution possible condition is satisfied. The “prefetching effect executable condition” is a condition related to whether or not the above-mentioned prefetching effect can be executed, and has a different meaning from the “prefetching permission flag” confirmed in the previous step S800.

In other words, the “prefetching permission flag” is used to determine whether or not the prefetching effect can be executed in the first place, and the “prefetching effect executable condition” is a state in which the prefetching effect can be executed. However, among these, it is a condition for determining whether or not to execute the prefetching effect.
In the present embodiment, it is determined that the pre-reading effect execution condition is satisfied in the following cases.

(1) A lottery element corresponding to non-winning exists before a specific lottery element (variation).
This is because, if the lottery element corresponding to the win is stored before the change to be prefetched, the big hit game is executed before the change, so the continuity of the prefetching effect is Because it will be lost.

(2) If a lottery element exists after the end of the big hit game, the lottery element has already been consumed.
This is because the internal state may have changed before and after the big hit game (for example, the probability of winning a special symbol has changed), so the pre-reading effect is not executed during the period when the internal state may have changed. Because.

(3) The stay mode is the rush mode.
This is because the pre-reading effect is executed only in a state where the state is a high probability state and a time shortening state and the higher probability state is clearly disclosed.

  Then, when all of the above three prefetch effect execution feasible conditions are satisfied (step S802: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S804. On the other hand, if any one of the above three prefetch effect executable conditions is not satisfied (step S802: No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 61).

  Step S804: The effect control CPU 126 determines whether or not to execute a prefetch effect. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 performs an effect lottery using a random number for the prefetch effect, and determines that the prefetch effect is executed when the effect lottery is won. In addition, when the lottery element to be prefetched corresponds to winning, the effect lottery may be won with higher probability than in the case where it corresponds to non-winning.

  As a result, when it is determined that the prefetch effect is to be executed (step S804: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S806. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pre-reading effect is not executed (step S804: No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 61).

  Step S806: The effect control CPU 126 executes the variation effect content prior determination process (the variation effect content prior determination means). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of determining effect contents to be executed by lottery when the change comes. The specific processing content will be further described later using another flowchart.

  Step S808: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of holding (storing) the contents of the variation effect determined in the previous step S806.

  Step S810: The effect control CPU 126 sets the change prefetch execution flag to ON. Here, the “variation prefetch execution flag” is a flag indicating whether or not the content of the variation has already been determined, and is set individually for each lottery element, and is stored in the RAM 130. (ON → determined; OFF → undecided).

  Step S812: The effect control CPU 126 executes the pre-change effect content predetermination process (the pre-change effect content predetermining means). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes processing for determining the effect content before the change based on the effect content of the change determined in the previous step S806. In the previous step S806, the effect contents of the change are determined by lottery, but here the effect contents are not lottery. That is, based on the effect content of the change determined in the previous step S806, the effect content before the change is designated. For example, if it is determined in the previous step S806 that the effect symbol is to be stopped and displayed in the form of “7”-“7”-“7”, “7”-“7”-“ The stop display mode is “7”-“7”-“5” before the second change, and the stop display mode is “7”-“7”-“4” before the third change. And so on. However, a lottery of whether to perform a countdown effect or a countup effect is performed.

  In addition, when executing the re-lottery effect, the countdown up effect and the countdown effect are not intended to execute the countdown up effect or the countdown effect with the final winning aspect as the final goal, but rather as the goal of the temporary winning aspect that temporarily stops temporarily. Need to run. For this reason, when it is determined in the previous step S806 that the re-lottery effect is to be executed, the non-winning mode in which the countdown up effect or the countdown effect is executed is designated with the temporary winning mode temporarily stopped as a target. To do.

  Step S814: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of holding (storing) the content of the pre-change effect determined in the previous step S812.

  Step S816: The effect control CPU 126 sets the pre-change prefetch execution flag to ON. Here, the “pre-change pre-read execution flag” is a flag that indicates whether or not the content of the effect before the change has already been determined, and is set individually for each lottery element. Stored (ON → determined; OFF → undecided).

Step S818: The effect control CPU 126 sets the prefetch permission flag to OFF.
When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 61).

[Preliminary decision processing for the content effect]
FIG. 64 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the above-described variation effect content prior determination process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S850: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the lottery element (newly stored lottery element) to be subjected to the previous determination is out of place (non-winning). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not a variation pattern destination determination command corresponding to non-winning is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the variation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the non-winning is stored (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S858. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the variation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the non-winning is not stored (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S852.

  Step S852: If the variation pattern destination determination command does not correspond to non-winning (missing) (step S850: No), then the production control CPU 126 selects the lottery element (newly stored lottery) as the target of the previous determination. Check whether the element is a big hit. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the variation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the big hit is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the variation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the big hit is stored (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S856. On the contrary, when it is confirmed that the variation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the big hit is not stored (No), the remaining is the variation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the small hit. S854 is executed.

  Step S854: The effect control CPU 126 executes a small hit hour variation effect pattern destination determination process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern destination determination command (for example, “10H00H” to “20H7FH”) received from the main control CPU 72. The effect pattern number is prepared in advance corresponding to the variation pattern destination determination command, and the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect pattern selection table (not shown) and determines the effect pattern number corresponding to the variation pattern destination determination command at that time. You can choose.

When the effect pattern number is selected, the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect table (not shown), and shows the change schedule (contents of change display effect) of the effect symbol corresponding to the change effect pattern number at that time, the mode of stop display, and the like. decide. Note that the types of effect symbols determined here correspond to the “combination of symbols at the time of a small hit”.
With this process, the effect control CPU 126 can first determine the effect pattern selected during the “small hit” variation.

  The above procedure is a case where it is determined in advance that it corresponds to “small hit”, but if it is previously determined that it corresponds to 16 round big hit, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S856.

  Step S856: The effect control CPU 126 executes a big hit hour variation effect pattern destination determination process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern destination determination command (for example, “30H00H” to “40H7FH”) received from the main control CPU 72.

When the effect pattern number at the time of the big hit is selected, the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect table (not shown), and the change schedule (the contents of the change display effect) of the effect symbol corresponding to the change effect pattern number at that time, and the stop display effect. The contents (for example, “7”-“7”-“7” etc.) are determined. Further, when the re-lottery effect is executed, the provisional winning mode and the final winning mode are also determined (re-lottery effect executing means).
By this processing, the effect control CPU 126 can first determine the effect pattern selected during the “big hit” fluctuation.

  Further, when the lottery element (newly stored lottery element) to be subjected to the previous determination is out of place (non-winning), the following procedure is executed.

  Step S858: The effect control CPU 126 executes a variation effect pattern destination determination process at the time of deviation. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at the time of deviation based on the variation pattern destination determination command (for example, “50H00H” to “56H7FH”) received from the main control CPU 72. Note that which effect pattern number is selected by the effect control CPU 126 is selected by a variation pattern destination determination command transmitted from the main control CPU 72.

When the effect pattern number at the time of losing is selected, the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect table (not shown), and the change schedule (the contents of the change display effect) of the effect symbol corresponding to the change effect pattern number at that time or the stop display effect. The contents (for example, “7”-“4”-“2” etc.) are determined.
By this processing, the effect control CPU 126 can first determine the effect pattern selected during the fluctuation of “out of time”.

  When any one of the processes in steps S854, S856, and S858 described above is executed, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S860.

Step S860: The effect control CPU 126 executes a notice effect destination determination process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects by lottery the content of the notice effect to be executed during the variable display effect when the lottery element subject to the previous determination is actually consumed and displayed in a variable manner. The content of the notice effect is, for example, the contents of various notice effects such as pre-change fluctuation stop sound, and is determined based on the result of the internal lottery (winning or non-winning).
Through these processes, the effect control CPU 126 can pre-determine the notice effect pattern that is selected during the fluctuation of “small hit time”, “big hit time”, or “out of time”.
When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the first determination effect management process (FIG. 63).

[Direction design management processing]
FIG. 65 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the effect symbol management process. The effect symbol management process includes an execution selection process (step S500), an effect symbol change pre-process (step S502), an effect symbol change process (step S504), an effect symbol stop display process (step S506), and a variable winning device operation. This is a configuration including a subroutine group of processing (step S508). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect symbol management process will be described along each process.

  Step S500: In the execution selection process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S502 to S508). For example, the effect control CPU 126 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the effect symbol management process in the “jump table” as the return address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the situation has not yet started the variation display effect, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol variation pre-processing (step S502) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the effect symbol variation pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol variation processing (step S504) as the next jump destination, and if the effect symbol variation in-process has been completed, As a jump destination, the effect symbol stop display in-process (step S506) is selected. The variable winning device operating process (step S508) is selected as a jump destination only when the variable winning device management process (step S5000 in FIG. 13) is selected in the main control CPU 72. In this case, steps S502 to S506 are not executed.

  Step S502: In the effect symbol variation pre-processing, the effect control CPU 126 performs an operation of preparing conditions for starting the variable display effect using the effect symbol. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the reach effect according to various conditions (lottery result, winning type, variation pattern, etc.), or produces an effect pattern for the notice effect (reach occurrence other than the pre-reading notice effect pattern). Select a previous notice pattern, a reach notice pattern after reach, etc.). In addition, the production control CPU 126 also performs demonstration production control when the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state. The specific processing content will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S504: In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 126 generates control information instructing the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) as necessary. For example, when performing an effect using the effect switching button 45 (execution of a movable article, etc.) while executing a variable display effect using an effect symbol, the effect control CPU 126 monitors whether or not the player has operated the effect button. The display control CPU 146 is instructed to control the content of the effect (button effect) according to the result.

  Step S506: In the effect symbol stop display processing, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the stop display effect using the effect symbols and moving images in a manner corresponding to the result of the internal lottery. That is, the effect control CPU 126 instructs the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) to end the variable display effect and execute the stop display effect. In response to this, the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) ends the variable display effect that has been actually executed within the display screen of the dot matrix LED display 42, and executes the stop display effect. Thereby, the stop display effect is executed substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol, and the result of the internal lottery can be effectively taught (disclosure, notification, notification, etc.) to the player (design effect execution). means). However, in the present embodiment, at the time of a small hit, the stop display effect is executed in a manner similar to or approximated to a loss.

  Step S508: In the variable winning device operation process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the effect during the small hit or the big hit. In this processing, the effect control CPU 126 selects the contents of the prominent effect according to various conditions (for example, winning type). For example, in the case of 16 round big hits, the effect control CPU 126 selects a 16-round big role effect pattern as the effect contents to be displayed on the dot matrix LED display 42, and this is selected for the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146). Instruct. As a result, the image of the big-bodied effect is displayed on the display screen of the dot matrix LED display 42, and the effect content changes as the round progresses.

[Preliminary design change processing]
FIG. 66 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the above-described effect symbol variation pre-processing. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S600: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not a demonstration effect command is received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not a demonstration effect command is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the command for demonstration effect is stored (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S602.

  Step S602: The effect control CPU 126 executes a demo selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects a demonstration effect pattern. The demonstration effect pattern defines the contents of the effect indicating that the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the last address of the effect symbol management process. Then, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process as it is, and controls the contents of the demonstration effect based on the demonstration effect pattern in the subsequent display output process (step S404 in FIG. 61) and lamp driving process (step S406 in FIG. 61). To do.

  On the other hand, if it is confirmed in step S600 that no demonstration effect command is stored (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S603a.

  Step S603a: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the prefetch execution flag is ON. There are two types of prefetch execution flags, the change prefetch execution flag and the pre-change prefetch execution flag. If any of the flags is on, it is determined that the prefetch execution flag is on.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the prefetch execution flag is ON (step S603a: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S603b. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the prefetch execution flag is OFF (step S603a: No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S604.

  Step S603b: The effect control CPU 126 executes a prefetch variation effect pattern setting process. Specifically, when the change look-ahead execution flag is ON, the effect control CPU 126 has the effect pattern (the content of the change effect) retained (stored) in the previous pre-decision effect management process (step S808 in FIG. 63). Set as is. When the pre-change pre-read execution flag is ON, the effect control CPU 126 stores the effect pattern (the effect content before change) held (stored) in the previous pre-decision effect management process (step S814 in FIG. 63). Set as is.

  Thus, according to the present embodiment, when the change prefetch execution flag and the pre-change prefetch execution flag are ON, the contents of the change effect and the contents of the pre-change effect are determined in advance. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform a lottery regarding the contents of the production at the start of the variation, and the control burden at the time of executing the prefetching effect can be reduced.

  Step S604: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current fluctuation is out of place (non-winning). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not a lottery result command at the time of non-winning is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is saved (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S612. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is not saved (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S606. Note that whether or not the current variation is off can be confirmed based on a variation pattern command or a stop symbol command in addition to the lottery result command. In other words, if the current variation pattern command corresponds to the outlier normal variation or outlier reach variation, it can be determined that the current variation is outlier. Alternatively, if the current stop symbol command specifies a non-winning symbol, it can be determined that the current variation is out of sync.

  Step S606: If the lottery result command is other than non-winning (missing) (step S604: No), the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current fluctuation is a big hit. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of the big hit is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of big hit is stored (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610. On the contrary, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of big hit is not stored (No), since only the lottery result command at the time of small hit is left, in this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S608. Whether or not the current variation is a big hit can also be confirmed based on a variation pattern command or a stop symbol command. That is, if the current variation pattern command corresponds to the big hit variation, it can be determined that the current variation is a big hit. If the current stop symbol command corresponds to the jackpot symbol, it can be determined that the current variation is a jackpot.

  Step S608: The effect control CPU 126 executes a small hit hour variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72 (for example, “C0H00H” to “D0H7FH”). The effect pattern number is prepared in advance corresponding to the variation pattern command, and the effect control CPU 126 can select an effect pattern number corresponding to the variation pattern command at that time by referring to an effect pattern selection table (not shown). it can. The production pattern numbers may be prepared in pairs with the variation pattern commands, or a plurality of production pattern numbers may be prepared for one variation pattern command.

  When the effect pattern number is selected, the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect table (not shown), and the effect symbol change schedule (change time, reach type and reach occurrence timing) corresponding to the change effect pattern number at that time, stop display The mode and the like are determined. Note that the types of effect symbols determined here correspond to the “combination of symbols at the time of a small hit”. In addition, since the content of the specific process is the same as that at the time of passing or the big hit time variation effect pattern selection process, it will be further described later using another flowchart.

  The above procedure corresponds to the case of “small hit”, but if it corresponds to 16 round big hit, the effect control CPU 126 confirms that it is “big hit” in step S606 (Yes). In this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610.

  Step S610: The effect control CPU 126 executes a big hit hour fluctuation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command (for example, “E0H00H” to “F0H7FH”) received from the main control CPU 72.

  When the effect pattern number at the time of the big hit is selected, the effect control CPU 126 refers to the effect table, and changes the effect schedule corresponding to the change effect pattern number at that time (the contents of the change display effect) and the contents of the stop display effect ( For example, “7”-“7”-“7” etc.) is determined. Further, when the re-lottery effect is executed, the temporary winning mode and the final winning mode are also determined (re-lottery effect executing means). Note that, in the big hit effect pattern selection process, the process may be further branched for each big hit stop symbol. The specific processing content will be further described later using another flowchart.

  In the case of non-winning, the following procedure is executed. In other words, when the effect control CPU 126 confirms that there is a shift in step S604 (Yes), it next executes step S612.

  Step S612: The effect control CPU 126 executes a deviation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at the time of deviation based on the variation pattern command (for example, “A0H00H” to “A6H7FH”) received from the main control CPU 72. The effect pattern numbers at the time of losing are classified into “ordinary deviation fluctuation”, “short-time deviation fluctuation”, “outlier reach fluctuation”, and the like, and a fine reach fluctuation pattern is defined in “outlier reach fluctuation”. Note that which effect pattern number is selected by the effect control CPU 126 is determined by the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control CPU 72.

  When the effect pattern number at the time of losing is selected, the effect control CPU 126 refers to the effect table, and the effect symbol change schedule corresponding to the change effect pattern number at that time (change time, presence / absence of reach, reach in the case of reach occurrence) Type and reach occurrence timing) and stop display mode (for example, “7”-“2”-“4”, etc.). The specific processing content will be further described later using another flowchart.

  When any one of the above steps S608, S610, and S612 is executed, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S614.

  Step S614: The effect control CPU 126 executes a notice selection process (notice effect executing means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the notice effect to be executed during the current variable display effect by lottery. The content of the notice effect is determined based on, for example, the result of internal lottery (winning or non-winning) and the current internal state (normal state, high probability state, time reduction state). As described above, the notice effect is for notifying the player of the possibility that the reach state will occur during the variable display effect, or for notifying that there is a possibility that it will eventually be a big hit. Therefore, the selection ratio of the notice effect is set to be low at the time of non-winning, but the selection ratio of the notice effect is set to be relatively high to increase the player's expectation at the time of winning.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol management process (end address). As a result, in the subsequent effect symbol variation processing (step S504 in FIG. 65), the variation display effect and the stop display effect are executed based on the actually selected variation effect pattern (effect execution means), and various A notice effect is executed based on the notice effect pattern. In addition, various stay mode effects are executed based on the background (stay) mode pattern selected here (effect execution means).

[Variation production pattern selection process during loss]
FIG. 67 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the off-time variation effect pattern selection process (step S612 in FIG. 66). Each procedure will be described below. Note that the big hit hour variation effect pattern selection process (step S610 in FIG. 66) will be described after the explanation of the lost hour variation effect pattern selection process.

  Step S900: The effect control CPU 126 refers to the variation pattern command. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and refers to the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72.

  Step S902: The production control CPU 126 determines whether or not the production effect can be executed. Specifically, the variation pattern command referred to in the previous step S900 is analyzed, and it is determined whether or not there is a sufficient variation time for executing the turning effect. At this time, if the reach effect is to be performed as a result of the analysis of the variation pattern command, it is determined whether or not the turn effect can be executed based on the time that the time required for the reach effect is omitted. judge. As a result of this determination, when it is determined that the roaring effect can be executed (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S904. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is impossible to execute the roaring effect (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S906.

  Step S904: The effect control CPU 126 executes a turn effect lottery. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines a turn effect pattern number by lottery for the turn effect included in the variable display effect by the effect design. In some cases, the lottery may result in no effect. The rolling lottery pattern number distinguishes the type (pattern) of the variable display effect by the effect symbol, or corresponds to the change time required for the variable display effect.

  In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect effect pattern number on the basis of the effect effect pattern determination random number shifted in the effect effect random number update process (step S410 in FIG. 61) and the “effect effect pattern selection table”. . In the “buzzing effect pattern selection table”, an option that does not execute the buzzing effect and a plurality of options consisting of a buzzing effect pattern corresponding to a plurality of types of “buzzing effects” are defined, and any one of them is specified. It is selected not to execute the pattern or turn effect. In addition, a plurality of production effects may be defined, and the production times may be defined differently. In that case, a production effect pattern corresponding to the production time that does not fall within the variation time determined by the variation pattern command is not selected. You may control as follows.

[Example of selection table for squealing effect pattern]
FIG. 68 is a diagram showing an example of a rotting effect pattern selection table.
This “buzzing effect pattern selection table” (variable display effect pattern defining means) has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “buzzing effect pattern number” are set and stored one byte at a time in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, 26 different values “50”, “65”, “80”, “95”, “107”, “119”,..., “252”, “255”. Is provided. Also, “0” to “25” of “buzzing effect pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  It is to be noted that, in these roaring effect pattern numbers “0” to “25”, different roaring effect patterns are set, for example, “the roaring effect pattern name” and “the roaring effect content” are set differently. . More specifically, the hit effect pattern number “7” is set with the hit effect pattern name “turn effect 7” and the hit effect content “chase effect with left / right effect patterns”. That is, it is set so that the effects shown in FIG. 48 to FIG. 50 or FIG. 48 to FIG. In addition, for example, the hit effect pattern number “12” is set with the hit effect pattern name “bounce effect 12” and the hit effect content “ghost effect with right effect pattern” (corresponding to FIGS. 52 and 53). In the squeezing effect pattern number “13”, the squeezing effect pattern name “skilling effect 13” and the screaming effect content “pushing effect effect by middle / right effect design” (corresponding to FIG. 54) are set. “14” is set to the squeeze effect pattern name “skill effect 14” and the scent effect content “addition effect” (corresponding to FIG. 55 and FIG. 56). Skill production 16 ", Skill production content" Multiply production "(corresponding to FIGS. 57 and 58) are set. Skill production pattern number" 18 "has a production effect pattern name" button-pressing production 1 ", in the production production "Button is pressed request performance in the roulette game effect" (Figure 59, corresponding to FIG. 60) has been set.

  The effect control CPU 126 sequentially compares the acquired roaring effect pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the above-mentioned roaring effect pattern selection table. Corresponding roaring effect pattern number is selected (variable display effect pattern selection means). For example, if the random effect pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the comparison value is sequentially compared from the beginning, and when compared with the comparison value “185”, the random value exceeds the comparison value. The effect control CPU 126 compares the next comparison value “191” with the random value. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the effect control CPU 126 selects “13” as the corresponding accent effect pattern number. At this time, the selected turn effect pattern number may be used as the turn effect flag. For example, when “13” is selected as the turn effect pattern number, “13” may be set as the turn effect flag. It should be noted that “0” is similarly set as the turn effect flag when the turn effect pattern number “0” in which the turn effect is not executed is selected. Therefore, when the roaring effect flag is a value larger than “0”, it indicates that the roaring effect is executed.

Here, the “turning effect content” corresponding to each “turning effect pattern number” in FIG. 68 will be described.
For the “frame advance effect by the right effect design” corresponding to the turn effect pattern number “1”, for example, the change display effect is started when the three effect designs scroll on the display screen of the dot matrix LED display 42. After that, when a certain amount of time has passed, the left effect design with numbers in dot characters in the left area of the display screen first stops, and then the right effect design with numbers in numbers in the right area stops. Starts from. When “Right effect design for frame advance effect” is started, the effect is such that the number of the dot characters shown in the right effect design in the right area of the display screen is changed to the next number by frame advance Is done. Specifically, when the left effect symbol with the numeral “7” in the dot character stops, the number indicated in the right effect symbol stops at “3”, and immediately after that, the number by the dot character changes to “ 4), “5”, and “6” are produced as if the frames are moving forward, and a roaring effect is executed such that when stopped at “7”, a tempering state may occur. In addition, when the frame advance effect by the right effect design is finished, the “frame advance effect by the right effect design” is also finished.

  After this roaring effect is completed, for example, a reach effect is executed. When the reach effect is not executed, the medium effect symbol stops in the middle region, the series of variable display effects ends, and the result display effect may be executed. Moreover, before this roaring effect is executed, for example, a pseudo-continuous change effect by an effect symbol may be executed. Specifically, after the three effect symbols stop in a specific combination mode, a pseudo continuous variation effect may be performed in which the variable display is started again. In addition, about the another roaring effect mentioned later, description about a common effect is abbreviate | omitted and only a different effect is demonstrated.

  The “rotation effect by the right effect design” corresponding to the turn effect pattern number “2” is, for example, that the left effect design in which numbers are written with dot characters in the left area in the display screen is stopped first, and then the dot is displayed in the right area. It starts when the right performance design with numbers written in letters stops. When the “rotation effect with the right effect design” is started, an effect is performed in which the number of the dot characters that appear on the right effect design in the right area of the display screen rotates and changes to the next number. The Specifically, if the left effect symbol with the number “7” in the dot character stops, the number indicated in the right effect symbol stops at “3” and immediately after that the number with the dot character appears Every time it rotates, an effect that fluctuates as if it was changed to “4”, “5”, and “6” is performed. .

  For example, in the “decaying effect by the right effect design” corresponding to the turn effect pattern number “3”, for example, the left effect design in which numbers are indicated by dot characters in the left area in the display screen is stopped first, and then the dot is displayed in the right area. It starts when the right performance design with numbers written in letters stops. When “Right effect design by collapsing effect” is started, an effect is performed in which the number of the dot characters written on the right effect design in the right area in the display screen collapses and changes to the next number. . Specifically, if the left effect symbol with the number “7” in the dot character stops, the number indicated in the right effect symbol stops at “3” and immediately after that the number with the dot character appears Each time the number collapses and disappears, an effect that fluctuates as a new number appears and is changed, such as “4”, “5”, and “6”, is performed. And if it is stopped at “6” and it is not changed, it will not be in a tempered state and it cannot be expected for “big hit”, but if it stops at “7” it will be in a tempered state and may be expected for “big hit”. Executed.

  For example, in the case of the “draft effect with the right effect pattern” corresponding to the turn effect pattern number “4”, for example, the left effect pattern in which numbers are indicated by dot characters in the left area in the display screen is stopped first, and then the dot is displayed in the right area. It starts when the right performance design with numbers written in letters stops. When the "Right effect design with the right effect design" is started, an effect is performed in which the number of the dot characters written in the right effect design in the right area of the display screen is changed to the next number. . Specifically, if the left effect symbol with the number “7” in the dot character stops, the number indicated in the right effect symbol stops at “3” and immediately after that the number with the dot character appears Each time the number melts and disappears, an effect that fluctuates as a new number appears and changes as “4”, “5”, “6” is performed. And if it is stopped at “6” and it is not changed, it will not be in a tempered state and it cannot be expected for “big hit”, but if it stops at “7” it will be in a tempered state and may be expected for “big hit”. Executed.

  For example, the “lightning effect by right effect design” corresponding to the turn effect pattern number “5” is, for example, that the left effect design in which numbers are written in dot characters in the left area of the display screen first stops, and then a dot appears in the right area. It starts when the right performance design with numbers written in letters stops. When “Lightning Design with Right Production Design” is started, the numbers of the dot characters displayed on the right production design in the right area of the display screen collapse as the lightning runs through the numbers, and the next An effect such as changing to a number is executed. Specifically, if the left effect symbol with the number “7” in the dot character stops, the number indicated in the right effect symbol stops at “3” and immediately after that the number with the dot character appears Every time the lightning runs through the numbers and collapses and disappears, a new production such as “4”, “5”, and “6” appears and changes. And if it is stopped at “6” and it is not changed, it will not be in a tempered state and it cannot be expected for “big hit”, but if it stops at “7” it will be in a tempered state and may be expected for “big hit”. Executed.

  The “explosion effect by the right effect design” corresponding to the turn effect pattern number “6” is, for example, that the left effect design in which numbers are indicated by dot characters in the left area in the display screen is stopped first, and then the dot is displayed in the right area. It starts when the right performance design with numbers written in letters stops. When the “explosion effect by the right effect design” is started, an effect is performed in which the number of the dot characters that were written in the right effect design in the right area of the display screen will explode and change to the next number. . Specifically, if the left effect symbol with the number “7” in the dot character stops, the number indicated in the right effect symbol stops at “3” and immediately after that the number with the dot character appears Each time the number explodes and disappears, an effect that fluctuates as a new number appears and is changed, such as “4”, “5”, and “6”, is performed. And if it is stopped at “6” and it is not changed, it will not be in a tempered state and it cannot be expected for “big hit”, but if it stops at “7” it will be in a tempered state and may be expected for “big hit”. Executed.

  The “chase effect with left / right effect design” corresponding to the turn effect pattern number “7” is, for example, that the left effect design in which numbers are written in dot characters in the left area in the display screen first stops, and then the right area It starts when the right effect design, which has the same numbers as the left effect design with dot characters, stops. A specific description of the “chase effect by the left / right effect symbols” is shown in FIGS. 48 to 51 and will be omitted.

  The “spotlight effect by the right effect design” corresponding to the turn effect pattern number “8” is, for example, that the left effect design in which numbers are indicated by dot characters in the left area in the display screen is stopped first, and then in the right area. It starts when the right effect design with numbers in dot letters stops. When the “spotlight effect with the right effect design” is started, the numbers of the dot characters that were written in the right effect design in the right area of the display screen once disappear, and each time the spotlight passes, An effect of changing to a number is executed. Specifically, if the left effect symbol with the number “7” in the dot character stops, the number indicated in the right effect symbol stops at “3” and immediately after that the number with the dot character appears Every time it disappears and the spotlight stops in the right area, a new effect such as “4”, “5”, “6” appears and changes. And if it is stopped at “6” and it is not changed, it will not be in a tempered state and it cannot be expected for “big hit”, but if it stops at “7” it will be in a tempered state and may be expected for “big hit”. Executed.

  The “shutter effect with left / right effect design” corresponding to the turn effect pattern number “9” is, for example, that the left effect design in which numbers are written in dot characters in the left area in the display screen first stops, and then the right area Is started when the right effect design on which the same numbers of dot letters as the left design are displayed is stopped. When the “shutter effect with left / right effect design” is started, the numbers of the dot characters that appear on the left and right effect designs on the display screen appear as if the shutter has been released over the entire area. The effect of disappearing and then changing to a new number is executed. Specifically, when the left effect design with the dot character “3” is stopped, the number shown on the right effect design stops at “3”, and immediately after that, the shutter is moved over the entire area. The numbers “3” and “3” disappear once as if they were cut, and the numbers in the dot letters are “4” and “4”, “5” and “5”, “6” and “6” on the left An effect that fluctuates as new numbers appear and change sequentially in the area and the right area is performed. And if it is changed to “7” or “6” at the next shutter effect, it will not become a tempered state and cannot be expected to be a “big hit”. A roaring effect that might be expected is performed.

  For example, in the “weapon destruction effect by the right effect design” corresponding to the turn effect pattern number “10”, for example, the left effect design in which numbers are indicated by dot characters in the left area in the display screen is stopped first, and then in the right area. It starts when the right effect design with numbers in dot letters stops. When the “weapon destruction effect with the right effect design” is started, the numbers of the dot characters that were written in the left effect design in the left area of the display screen once disappeared, and then the weapon was placed in the left and middle areas. An effect such as the appearance of a character is executed. At that time, an effect is performed in which the same movable accessory (any one of 60a to 60d) as the weapon possessed by the character displayed in the display screen rises. Then, an effect is performed in which the character is attacked on the right effect design that has stopped in the right area, and the character is changed to the next number as if the attack of the character is successful. Specifically, if the left effect symbol with the dot character “7” is stopped, the number indicated on the right effect symbol stops at “3” and immediately after that the character with the weapon Will appear, and the numbers with dot characters will change as if the new numbers appear and change with every attack with the character's weapon, such as “4”, “5”, “6”. . And if it is stopped at “6” and it is not changed, it will not be in a tempered state and it cannot be expected for “big hit”, but if it stops at “7” it will be in a tempered state and may be expected for “big hit”. Executed.

  In the “magic square effect with the right effect design” corresponding to the turn effect pattern number “11”, for example, first, the left effect design in which numbers are written in dot characters in the left area in the display screen stops, and then in the right area. It starts when the right effect design with numbers in dot letters stops. When the “Magic square effect with the right effect design” is started, the effect is that the number of the dot characters on the right effect design in the right area of the display screen will explode due to magic and change to the next number. Executed. At that time, the effect that the movable accessory 60c representing the cane rises is executed. Specifically, if the left effect symbol with the number “7” in the dot character stops, the number indicated in the right effect symbol stops at “3” and immediately after that the number with the dot character appears Every time a number explodes due to magic and disappears, an effect that fluctuates as a new number appears and is changed, such as “4”, “5”, and “6”, is performed. And if it is stopped at “6” and it is not changed, it will not be in a tempered state and it cannot be expected for “big hit”, but if it stops at “7” it will be in a tempered state and may be expected for “big hit”. Executed.

  For example, in the “ghost effect production by the right production design” corresponding to the turn production pattern number “12”, for example, the left production design in which numbers are indicated by dot characters in the left area in the display screen is stopped first, and then in the right area. It starts when the right effect design with numbers in dot letters stops. A specific description of the “ghost grab effect with the right effect design” is omitted because it is shown in FIGS. 52 and 53.

  For example, in the “push-in effect with the middle / right effect design” corresponding to the turn effect pattern number “13”, for example, the left effect design in which numbers are indicated by dot characters in the left area in the display screen stops, and then the right area When the right effect design with the number corresponding to the next order of the left effect design is stopped with a dot character, and then the middle effect design with the same number as the left effect design with a dot character is stopped in the middle area Starts from. Note that the specific description of the “push-in effect by the middle / right effect design” is omitted because it is shown in FIG.

  In the “addition effect” corresponding to the turn effect pattern number “14”, for example, the left effect design in which numbers are written with dot characters in the left area in the display screen stops, and then numbers in the right area with dot characters. The right effect design described is stopped, and thereafter, the middle effect design in which a number (or “+” character) is displayed with dot characters in the middle region is started. Here, as a premise that the “addition effect” is performed, in order to execute a roaring effect that may become a tempered state, numbers (or “ The combination of “+” characters) is limited. That is, in order to be in the tempering state, the numbers written in the left effect symbol and the right effect symbol need to be the same, and must be a multiple of 11. For example, in order to execute a roaring effect (“addition effect”) that may result in a “1” and “1” tempering state, combinations of each effect symbol are “3 + 8”, “4 + 7”, “101” It is necessary to stop at such as. In addition, in order to execute a roaring effect (“addition effect”) that may result in a “7” and “7” tempering state, the combinations according to each effect symbol are “716”, “473”, It is necessary to stop at “725” or the like. Here, when the effect symbol is stopped by a combination of “101”, “716”, “473”, the effect that “+” character appears as a new dot character, that is, “10 + 1”, “71 + 6”, “4 + 73”. The effect displayed is executed. A specific description of this “addition effect” is shown in FIGS. 55 and 56, and will be omitted.

  In the “subtraction effect” corresponding to the turn effect pattern number “15”, for example, the left effect design in which numbers are written with dot characters in the left area in the display screen is stopped, and then the numbers with dot characters are displayed in the right area. The right effect design described is stopped, and thereafter, the middle design design in which numbers are indicated by dot characters in the middle region is started. Here, as a premise that the “subtraction effect” is performed, a combination of numbers in the dot characters of the effect design that stops in each area in the display screen is performed because a roaring effect that may become a tempered state is executed. Limited. For example, in order to execute a roaring effect (“subtraction effect”) that may result in a “1” and “1” tempering state, combinations of each effect symbol are “209”, “132”, “154”. It is necessary to stop at such as. In addition, in order to execute a roaring effect (“subtraction effect”) such as “7” and “7” that may become a tempered state, the combination by each effect symbol is “792”, “836”, It is necessary to stop at “858” or the like. Here, when the effect design stops with a combination of “209”, “132”, and “792”, an effect that a new “−” character appears as a dot character, that is, “20-9”, “13-2”. The effect displayed as “79-2” is executed. Note that the specific description of the “subtraction effect” is the same as the addition effect, and is omitted.

  In the “multiplication effect” corresponding to the turn effect pattern number “16”, for example, the left effect design in which numbers are written with dot characters in the left area in the display screen stops, and then numbers in the right area with dot characters. The right effect design described is stopped, and thereafter, the middle performance design in which numbers are indicated by dot characters in the middle region is started. Here, as a premise that the “multiplication effect” is performed, a combination of numbers in the dot characters of the effect design that stops in each area in the display screen is performed because a roaring effect that may be a tempered state is executed. Limited. For example, in order to execute a roaring effect (“multiplication effect”) that may result in a “6” and “6” tempering state, combinations of each effect symbol are “661”, “332”, “233”. It is necessary to stop at such as. In addition, in order to execute a roaring effect (“multiplication effect”) such that “7” and “7” may be in a tempered state, the combinations of each effect symbol are “771” and “177”. Must be stopped. Here, when the effect design stops with a combination of “661”, “332”, and “771”, an effect that “x” characters newly appear as dot characters, that is, “66 × 1”, “33 × 2”. The effect displayed as “77 × 1” is executed. A specific description of this “multiplication effect” is shown in FIG. 57 and FIG.

  In the “division effect” corresponding to the turn effect pattern number “17”, for example, the left effect design in which numbers are written with dot characters in the left area in the display screen stops, and then numbers in the right area with dot characters. The right effect design described is stopped, and thereafter, the middle design design in which numbers are indicated by dot characters in the middle region is started. Here, as a premise that the “division effect” is performed, a combination of numbers in the dot characters of the effect design that stops in each area in the display screen is performed because a roaring effect that may become a tempered state is executed. Limited. For example, in order to execute a roaring effect (“division effect”) that may result in a “2” and “2” tempering state, the combinations of each effect symbol are “663”, “442”, “221”. It is necessary to stop at such as. In addition, in order to execute a roaring effect (“division effect”) that may become a “7” and “7” tempering state, the combination by each effect symbol is stopped at “771”. There is a need. Here, when the effect design stops with a combination of “663”, “442”, “771”, the effect that “÷” characters newly appear as dot characters, that is, “66 ÷ 3”, “44 ÷ 2”. The effect displayed as “77 ÷ 1” is executed. Note that the specific description of the “division effect” is the same as the multiplication effect, and is omitted.

  In the “button press request effect during roulette effect” corresponding to the turn effect pattern number “18”, for example, the left effect symbol in which numbers are written in dot characters in the left area in the display screen stops, and then the right area The right effect design in which numerals are written in dot characters is stopped, and then the middle effect design in which numbers are written in dot characters in the middle area is stopped. Here, as a premise that the “button press request effect during the roulette effect” is performed, the dot character of the effect symbol that stops in each area in the display screen in order to execute a roaring effect that may be in a tempered state Number combinations in are limited. For example, in order to execute a roaring effect (“button press request effect during roulette effect”) that may be a “1” and “1” tempering state, the combination of each effect symbol is “125”, It is necessary to stop at “024”, “891” or the like. That is, it is necessary to stop at a combination of numbers around the number “1” (for example, four in order) in the tempering state. This is because the options constituting the selection by roulette (selection of one combination out of the six combinations) are configured from combinations around the numeral “1”. A specific description of the “button press request effect during the roulette effect” is shown in FIGS. 59 and 60 and will not be repeated.

  The “button press request effect after transformation (darkening) effect of all effect symbols” corresponding to the turn effect pattern number “19” is, for example, a left effect symbol in which a number is indicated by dot characters in the left area in the display screen. Then, the right effect design in which numbers are written with dot characters in the right area is stopped, and then the medium effect design in which numbers are written with dot characters in the middle area is stopped. When the “button press request effect after the transformation (darkness) effect of all effects design” is started, the lightness and darkness of the numbers of the dot characters displayed on each effect design on the display screen changes as if they were reversed. Such an effect is executed. Specifically, an effect is performed in which the LEDs of the internal dot portions except for the outline portions of the dot portions that have been lit up are turned off. Thereafter, an effect by the character is performed, and a button press request effect (for example, (A) in FIG. 42) is performed. Then, after a certain amount of time has passed, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed, and the snarling effect (“the button press request effect after the transformation (dark)) effect of all the effect effects” is finished. If the medium effect symbol is blank or in a variable display, the reach effect is performed.

  The “button press request effect after deformation (charging) effect of all effect symbols” corresponding to the turn effect pattern number “20” is, for example, a left effect symbol in which a number is indicated by a dot character in the left area in the display screen. Then, the right effect design in which numbers are written with dot characters in the right area is stopped, and then the medium effect design in which numbers are written with dot characters in the middle area is stopped. When the “button press request effect after the transformation (charging) effect of all effect designs” is started, the dot character numbers shown on each effect design on the display screen change as if electricity is running An effect such as performing is performed. Thereafter, an effect by the character is performed, and a button press request effect (for example, (A) in FIG. 42) is performed. Then, after a certain amount of time has passed, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed, and the snarling effect (“the button press request effect after the transformation (charging) effect of all effect symbols) is finished.” If the medium effect symbol is blank or in a variable display, the reach effect is performed.

  For example, “button press request effect after stopping the effect design with“ weapon character ”” corresponding to the turn effect pattern number “21” has “kata” of katakana with dot characters in the left area in the display screen. It starts when the left effect symbol stops and then the right effect symbol with the katakana “n” written as a dot character in the right area stops. In addition, the combination of the left effect and the right effect stops with the combination of characters representing “weapons” such as “ta” and “te”, “tsu” and “e”, and “o” and “no”. It is also started at the time. When the “button press request effect after stopping the effect symbol with“ weapon characters ”” is started, an effect by the character is performed, and a button press request effect (for example, (A) in FIG. 42) is performed. At this time, an effect is produced in which the same movable combination (any one of 60a to 60d) as the combination of characters representing “weapon” rises. Then, after a certain amount of time has passed, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed, and the sword effect (the “button press request effect after the effect symbol stop with“ weapon character ”” ends. At this time, the dot character is changed to a number. If the left / right effect symbol is in the tempered state and the medium effect symbol is blank or in a variable display, the reach effect is performed.

  The “6” “0” “5” button press request effect after stopping the design symbol corresponding to the turn effect pattern number “22” has a dot character “6” in the left area of the display screen. The left effect design is stopped, then the right effect design with the dot character “5” in the right area is stopped, and then the number “0” is displayed in the middle area with the dot character. It starts when the medium production symbol stops. When this “6”, “0”, “5” button press request effect after stopping the design symbol is started, an effect by the character is performed, and a button press request effect (for example, (A) in FIG. 42). Is done. At this time, an effect in which the movable accessory (60a to 60d) or the like operates is executed. Then, when a certain amount of time has passed, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed, and the squealing effect (the “button press request effect after the effect symbol stop at“ 6 ”“ 0 ”“ 5 ”) ends. If the effect symbol is in the tempered state and the medium effect symbol is blank or in a variable display, the reach effect is performed.

  “4”, “0”, “1” button press request effect after stop effect design corresponding to the turn effect pattern number “23”, “6” “5” corresponding to the turn effect pattern number “24” Regarding the “button press request effect after stop of the effect symbol at“ 9 ”” and “button press request effect after stop of the effect symbol at“ 4 ”,“ 5 ”and“ 9 ”” corresponding to the turn effect “25” An effect similar to the effect pattern number “22” is performed. In addition, the production by the character in each production is performed differently.

  As described above, when the turn effect pattern number is selected by the turn effect lottery process, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S907. If it is determined in step S902 that it is impossible to execute the turning effect (step S902: No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S906.

[Refer to FIG. 67: Variation Effect Pattern Selection Processing at Out of Time]
Step S906: The effect control CPU 126 resets the turn effect flag and sets the value to zero. That is, as described above, “0” is set as the turn effect flag to indicate that the turn effect is not executed. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S907.

  Step S907: The effect control CPU 126 executes other effect settings based on the effect symbols. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect table (fluctuation display effect pattern defining means) (not shown), and the change schedule of the effect symbol corresponding to the change effect pattern number and the turning effect pattern number at that time (the change display effect of the change display effect). Content) (variable display effect pattern selection means). In addition, when the re-lottery effect is executed, the change schedule is also determined. In this process, for example, a variable display effect other than the squeak effect by the effect design may be set. Note that the variable display effect related to the roaring effect may be set in the roaring effect selection. For example, when “5” is selected as the turn effect pattern number, combinations (“1”, “2”, “3”, “7”, “8”, and “9”) that make each effect symbol in order (or reverse order). , “7”, “6”, “5”, “3”, “2”, “1”, etc.), and then a variable display effect such that all effect symbols are displayed in a variable display effect (so-called pseudo-continuous variable effect) again. May be set when selecting the production effect.

  Step S908: The effect control CPU 126 executes the effect symbol lottery process at the time of losing. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 includes the content of the result display effect (for example, a combination pattern such as “5”-“6”-“5”), and the content at the time of temporary stop at the start of the roaring effect (for example, “1”-“ Combination pattern such as “Fluctuating” — “1”), and the combination pattern of the effect symbols such as the contents when temporarily stopping at the end of the roaring effect (for example, “5” — “Fluctuating” — “5” combination pattern) To decide. The specific processing content will be further described later using another flowchart.

  Step S910: The effect control CPU 126 determines whether or not to execute a reach effect. Specifically, the variation pattern command referred to in the previous step S900 is analyzed, and a determination is made based on whether or not the variation pattern is a reach effect. As a result of this determination, when it is determined that the reach effect is to be executed (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S912. On the other hand, when it is determined not to execute the reach effect (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol variation pre-processing (FIG. 66).

  Step S912: The effect control CPU 126 sets a reach effect. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 refers to a reach pattern selection table (not shown) based on the turn effect flag or the like, and sets the reach effect corresponding to the change pattern command at that time (determination of the type (content) of reach effect), Schedule setting). When the installation of the reach effect ends, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol fluctuation pre-process (FIG. 66).

[Exhibition drawing lottery process]
FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the off-stage effect design lottery process (step S908 in FIG. 67). Each procedure will be described below.

  Step S952: The effect control CPU 126 determines whether or not to execute a turn effect. Specifically, the turn effect flag set in the previous step S904 or step S906 is referred to, and the determination is made based on whether or not the value of the turn effect flag is greater than zero. As a result of this determination, when it is determined that the roaring effect is to be executed (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S954. On the other hand, when it is determined not to execute the roaring effect (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S956.

  Step S954: The effect control CPU 126 determines whether or not to execute a reach effect. Specifically, the variation pattern command referred to in the previous step S900 is analyzed, and a determination is made based on whether or not the variation pattern is a reach effect. As a result of this determination, when it is determined that the reach effect is to be executed (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S964. On the other hand, when it is determined not to execute the reach effect (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S966.

  Step S956: The effect control CPU 126 determines whether or not to execute a reach effect. Specifically, the variation pattern command referred to in the previous step S900 is analyzed, and a determination is made based on whether or not the variation pattern is a reach effect. As a result of this determination, when it is determined that the reach effect is to be executed (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S960. On the other hand, when it is determined not to execute the reach effect (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S962.

  Step S960: The effect control CPU 126 refers to the effect symbol combination pattern selection table for non-turning effect during reach. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 is an effect at the time when the variable display effect is out of order, and executes the reach effect during the variable display effect and does not execute the roaring effect. Refer to “Drawing effect combination pattern selection table for non-turning production at reach” (production design stop eye defining means). In the “reaching pattern combination pattern selection table for non-turning effect at the time of detachment”, a plurality of types of effect symbol combination patterns displayed at the time of the result display effect by the effect symbol are defined in advance. Note that the content of the “design pattern selection table for effect of non-turning when reaching out” will be described later with reference to another drawing. When the reference of the effect symbol combination pattern selection table for the non-turning effect for reach is completed, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S970.

  Step S962: The effect control CPU 126 refers to the effect symbol combination pattern selection table for the non-reach non-turn effect. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 stores the effect in the ROM 128 when the variable display effect is out of effect and does not execute the reach effect during the variable display effect and also does not execute the turning effect. Refer to the “design pattern selection table for non-reaming effect design combination pattern selection table” (effect design stop eye defining means) at the time of non-reach. In the “effect pattern combination pattern selection table for non-reach at the time of non-reach effect”, a plurality of types of effect symbol combination patterns to be displayed at the result display effect by the effect symbols are defined in advance. The contents of the “design pattern selection table for non-reaching / non-turning effect at the time of slipping” will be further described later with reference to another drawing. When the reference of the effect symbol combination pattern selection table for the non-reach non-turning effect ends, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S970.

  Step S964: The effect control CPU 126 refers to the effect symbol combination pattern selection table for the reach effect during reach. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 is an effect at the time when the variable display effect is off, and executes the reach effect during the variable display effect and also executes the turn effect. Refer to “Drawing effect combination pattern selection table for directing effect during reach” (effect design stop eye defining means). In the “reaching pattern combination pattern selection table for the effect of reaching at the time of loss”, a plurality of types of combination patterns of the effect symbols displayed at the time of the result display effect by the effect symbols are defined in advance. In addition, a plurality of types (for example, table A, table B, table C, etc.) of “reaching pattern combination pattern selection table for reach at the time of loss” are stored, The “reaching design combination pattern selection table for directing when reaching” is selected. Note that the contents of “the effect symbol combination pattern selection table for reaching at the time of loss” will be described later with reference to another drawing. When the reference of the effect symbol combination pattern selection table for the reach effect at the time of reach is finished, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S970.

  Step S966: The effect control CPU 126 refers to the effect symbol combination pattern selection table for non-reach time effect. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 is an effect at the time when the variable display effect is off, and does not execute the reach effect during the variable display effect, but stores the roaring effect in the ROM 128. Reference is made to the effect symbol combination pattern selection table for non-reach-time effect at the time of loss ”(effect symbol stop eye defining means). In this “effect pattern combination pattern selection table for non-reach time effect at the time of losing”, a plurality of types of combination patterns of effect symbols displayed at the time of the result display effect by the effect symbols are defined in advance. In addition, a plurality of types (for example, table A, table B, table C, etc.) of “effect pattern combination pattern selection table for non-reach at the time of breakage” are stored. “Non-reach-time production effect combination pattern selection table” is selected. Note that the content of the “design pattern selection table for producing the non-reach-time effect at the time of loss” will be described later with reference to another drawing. When the reference of the effect symbol combination pattern selection table for the non-reach time effect is completed, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S970.

[Example of effect pattern combination pattern selection table for non-buzzing effects during reach at the time of loss]
FIG. 70 is a diagram illustrating an example of the effect symbol combination pattern selection table for non-turning effects at the time of detachment.
This “effect pattern combination pattern selection table for non-buzzing effects at the time of loss” has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “combination pattern number” are set and stored in order of 16 bits from the start address. . “Comparison value” includes, for example, 90 different values “728”, “1456”, “2185”, “2913”, “3641”, “4369”,..., “64807”, “65535” Is provided. In addition, “combination pattern numbers” “101” to “190” are assigned to the respective “comparison values”.

  These combination pattern numbers “101” to “190” are set with different combinations of effect designs. For example, “left effect design“ L ””, “middle effect design“ C ””, “ The combination of the right performance symbol “R” is set differently. Specifically, for the combination pattern number “107”, a combination of “0” for the left effect symbol “L”, “7” for the middle effect symbol “C”, and “0” for the right effect symbol “R” is set. Has been. Therefore, when this combination pattern number “107” is selected, in the result display effect by the effect design, “0” in the left area, “7” in the middle area, and “7” in the right area in the display screen. The effect design in which the number consisting of dot characters such as “0” is written is stopped. In addition, for the combination pattern number “121”, combinations such as “1” for the left effect symbol “L”, “2” for the middle effect symbol “C”, and “1” for the right effect symbol “R” are set. A total of 90 different combination patterns are set for each combination pattern number.

[Example of effect pattern combination pattern selection table for non-reel production when non-reach at the time of loss]
FIG. 71 is a diagram showing an example of the effect symbol combination pattern selection table for non-reach non-turning effects at the time of detachment.
This “effect pattern combination pattern selection table for non-reach at the time of non-reach” is a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “combination pattern number” are set and stored in order of 16 bits from the start address. is there. The “comparison value” includes, for example, 900 different values “73”, “146”, “218”, “291”, “364”, “437”,..., “65462”, “65535”. Is provided. Also, “combination pattern numbers” “1001” to “1900” are assigned to the respective “comparison values”.

  These combination pattern numbers “1001” to “1900” are set with different combinations of effect designs. For example, “left effect design“ L ””, “middle effect design“ C ””, “ The combination of the right performance symbol “R” is set differently. Specifically, the combination pattern number “1007” is set such that the left effect symbol “L” is “0”, the middle effect symbol “C” is “0”, and the right effect symbol “R” is “7”. Has been. Therefore, when this combination pattern number “1007” is selected, in the result display effect by the effect symbol, “0” is displayed in the left area, “0” is displayed in the middle area, and “0” is displayed in the right area. The effect design in which the number consisting of dot characters such as “7” is written is stopped. In addition, the combination pattern number “1021” is set such that the left effect symbol “L” is “0”, the middle effect symbol “C” is “2”, and the right effect symbol “R” is “3”. A total of 900 different combination patterns are set for each combination pattern number.

[Example of effect symbol combination pattern selection table for reaching at the time of loss]
72 to 74 are diagrams showing an example of the effect symbol combination pattern selection table for reaching at the time of loss. FIG. 72 shows the effect symbol combination pattern selection table A for reach at the time of loss, FIG. 73 shows effect pattern combination pattern selection table B for the effect at the time of loss, and FIG. 74 shows the effect at the time of loss. It is a figure which shows the effect symbol combination pattern selection table C for the effect at the time of reach. These reach design pattern selection tables A, B, and C for reach production at the time of detachment are referred to based on the turn effect flag. For example, when the turn effect flag is “1”, that is, when the “frame advance effect by the right effect design” is performed at the time of the turn effect, “the effect design combination pattern selection table A for the reach effect at the time of detachment” Is referred to. In addition, when the roaring effect flag has values such as “2” to “13” and “18” to “25”, “the effect symbol combination pattern selection table A for the effect at the time of loss” is referred to. . In addition, “the effect symbol combination pattern selection table B for reaching at the time of loss” indicates that when the turning effect flag is “14” or “15”, that is, at the turning effect, “addition effect” or “subtraction effect”. "Is referred to when. And, “the effect symbol combination pattern selection table C for reach production at the time of loss” indicates that when the production effect flag is “16” or “17”, that is, when the production effect is “multiplication effect” or “division effect”. "Is referred to when. In addition, it is not limited to the effect symbol combination pattern selection tables A to C for the reach effect during reach, but a table corresponding to the effect effect flag may be further defined.

[Drawing symbol combination pattern selection table A for reaching at the time of loss]
For example, the “reaching design combination pattern selection table A for reaching at the time of loss” has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “combination pattern number” are set and stored in order of 16 bits from the start address. . “Comparison value” includes, for example, 90 different values “728”, “1456”, “2185”, “2913”, “3641”, “4369”,..., “64807”, “65535” Is provided. In addition, “4001” to “4090” of “combination pattern numbers” are assigned to the respective “comparison values”.

  These combination pattern numbers “4001” to “4090” are set with different combinations of effect designs. For example, “left effect design“ L ””, “middle effect design“ C ””, “ The combination of the right performance symbol “R” is set differently. Specifically, in the combination pattern number “4007”, a combination of “0” for the left effect symbol “0”, “7” for the middle effect symbol “C”, and “0” for the right effect symbol “R” is set. Has been. Therefore, when this combination pattern number “4007” is selected, in the result display effect by the effect design, “0” is displayed in the left area, “7” is displayed in the middle area, and “7” is displayed in the right area. The effect design in which the number consisting of dot characters such as “0” is written is stopped. In addition, for the combination pattern number “4021”, combinations such as “2” for the left effect symbol “L”, “3” for the middle effect symbol “C”, and “2” for the right effect symbol “R” are set. A total of 90 different combination patterns are set for each combination pattern number.

[Direction pattern selection pattern selection table B for reaching when reaching out]
This “reaching time effect design combination pattern selection table B at the time of loss” has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “combination pattern number” are set and stored in order of 16 bits from the start address. . The “comparison value” includes, for example, 81 different values “809”, “1618”, “2427”, “3236”, “4045”, “4854”,..., “64726”, “65535”. Is provided. In addition, “combination pattern numbers” “5001” to “5081” are assigned to the respective “comparison values”.

  The combination pattern numbers “5001” to “5081” are set with different combinations of effect designs. For example, “left effect design“ L ””, “middle effect design“ C ””, “ The combination of the right performance symbol “R” is set differently. Specifically, in the combination pattern number “5007”, a combination of “1” for the left effect symbol “L”, “7” for the middle effect symbol “C”, and “1” for the right effect symbol “R” is set. Has been. Therefore, when this combination pattern number “5007” is selected, in the result display effect by the effect design, “1” is displayed in the left area in the display screen, “7” is displayed in the middle area, and “7” is displayed in the right area. The effect design in which the number consisting of dot characters such as “1” is written is stopped. In addition, for the combination pattern number “5021”, combinations such as “3” for the left effect symbol “L”, “2” for the middle effect symbol “C”, and “3” for the right effect symbol “R” are set. A total of 81 different combination patterns are set for each combination pattern number.

[Direction design combination pattern selection table C for directing when reaching out]
For example, the “reaching design combination pattern selection table C for reaching at the time of loss” has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “combination pattern number” are set and stored in order of 16 bits from the start address. . “Comparison value” includes, for example, 72 different values “910”, “1820”, “2731”, “3641”, “4551”, “5461”,..., “64625”, “65535”. Is provided. In addition, “combination pattern numbers” “6001” to “6072” are assigned to the respective “comparison values”.

  These combination pattern numbers “6001” to “6072” are set with different combinations of effect designs. For example, “left effect design“ L ””, “middle effect design“ C ””, “ The combination of the right performance symbol “R” is set differently. Specifically, in the combination pattern number “6007”, a combination of “2” for the left effect symbol “L”, “7” for the middle effect symbol “C”, and “2” for the right effect symbol “R” is set. Has been. Therefore, when this combination pattern number “6007” is selected, in the result display effect by the effect symbol, “2” is displayed in the left area, “7” is displayed in the middle area, and “7” is displayed in the right area. The effect design in which the number consisting of dot characters such as “2” is written is stopped. In addition, for the combination pattern number “6021”, combinations such as “4” for the left effect symbol “L”, “2” for the middle effect symbol “C”, and “4” for the right effect symbol “R” are set. A total of 72 different combination patterns are set for each combination pattern number.

[Example of effect pattern combination pattern selection table for non-reach time effect at the time of loss]
FIG. 75 to FIG. 78 are diagrams showing an example of the effect symbol combination pattern selection table for non-reach-time production effects at the time of loss. FIG. 75 shows a non-reach-time production effect combination pattern selection table A at the time of failure, FIG. 76 shows a non-reach-time production effect combination pattern selection table B at the time of failure, and FIG. FIG. 78 is a diagram showing an effect symbol combination pattern selection table C for non-reach-time production at non-reach time, and FIG. 78 is a diagram showing an effect symbol combination pattern selection table D for non-reach-time production at the time of loss. The non-reach-time production effect combination pattern selection tables A, B, C, and D at the time of non-reach are referred to based on the production effect flag. For example, when the turning effect flag is “1”, that is, when the “frame advance effect by the right effect design” is performed at the time of the turning effect, “the effect pattern combination pattern selection table for the non-reach-time turning effect at the time of slipping” Reference is made to “A”. In addition, when the roaring effect flag has a value such as “2” to “6”, “8”, “10” to “12”, “non-reach-time effect effect pattern combination pattern selection table A at the time of disconnection” Is referred to. In addition, “the effect design combination pattern selection table B for the non-reach at the time of falling off” indicates that when the turn effect flag is “7” or “9”, that is, when the turn effect is made, This is referred to when “chase effect” or “shutter effect with left / right effect symbols” is performed. And, “the effect combination pattern selection table C for the non-reach time effect at the time of slipping” has the “push effect by the middle / right effect design” when the turn effect flag is “13”, that is, at the turn effect. The “combination effect pattern combination selection table D for non-reach time production at the time of loss” is referred to in the case where the performance effect flag is “19” to “25”, that is, “ This is referred to when a button press request effect or the like is performed after an effect symbol deformation (darkening) effect. Note that with respect to the other roaring effect flags, a non-reach-time roaring effect effect symbol combination pattern selection table that is different from the above and is not illustrated is also referred to. Moreover, it is not limited to these non-reach-time production effect combination pattern selection tables A to D, but a table corresponding to the production effect flag may be further defined.

[Direction pattern combination pattern selection table A for non-reach-time production at the time of loss]
This “effect pattern combination pattern selection table A for non-reach at the time of loss” has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “combination pattern number” are set and stored in order of 16 bits from the start address. is there. The “comparison value” includes, for example, 300 different values “218”, “437”, “655”, “874”, “1092”, “1311”,..., “65317”, “65535”. Is provided. In addition, “combination pattern numbers” “7001” to “7300” are assigned to the respective “comparison values”.

  These combination pattern numbers “7001” to “7300” are set with different combinations of effect designs. For example, “left effect design“ L ””, “middle effect design“ C ””, “ The combination of the right performance symbol “R” is set differently. Specifically, the combination pattern number “7007” includes a combination of “0” for the left effect symbol “L”, “2” for the middle effect symbol “C”, and “7” for the right effect symbol “R”. Has been. Therefore, when this combination pattern number “7007” is selected, in the result display effect by effect design, “0” is displayed in the left area, “2” in the middle area, and “2” in the right area. The effect design in which the number consisting of dot characters such as “7” is written is stopped. In addition, for the combination pattern number “7021”, combinations such as “0” for the left effect symbol “L”, “6” for the middle effect symbol “C”, and “9” for the right effect symbol “R” are set. A total of 300 different combination patterns are set for each combination pattern number.

[Produce pattern combination pattern selection table B for non-reach time effect at the time of loss]
This “non-reach time effect design combination pattern selection table B at the time of loss” has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “combination pattern number” are set and stored in order of 16 bits from the start address. is there. The “comparison value” includes, for example, 100 different values “655”, “1311”, “1966”, “2621”, “3277”, “3932”,..., “64880”, “65535”. Is provided. In addition, “combination pattern numbers” “8001” to “8100” are assigned to the respective “comparison values”.

  These combination pattern numbers “8001” to “8100” are set with different combinations of effect designs. For example, “left effect design“ L ””, “middle effect design“ C ””, “ The combination of the right performance symbol “R” is set differently. Specifically, for the combination pattern number “8007”, combinations such as “0” for the left effect symbol “L”, “6” for the middle effect symbol “C”, and “9” for the right effect symbol “R” are set. Has been. Therefore, when this combination pattern number “8007” is selected, in the result display effect by the effect symbol, “0” is displayed in the left area, “6” is displayed in the middle area, and “6” is displayed in the right area. The effect design in which the number consisting of dot characters such as “9” is written is stopped. In addition, the combination pattern number “8021” is set such that the left effect symbol “L” is “2”, the middle effect symbol “C” is “0”, and the right effect symbol “R” is “1”. A total of 100 different combination patterns are set for each combination pattern number.

[Produce pattern combination pattern selection table C for non-reach-time production at the time of loss]
This “non-reach time effect design combination pattern selection table C at the time of loss” has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “combination pattern number” are set and stored in order of 16 bits from the start address. is there. The “comparison value” includes, for example, ten different values “6554”, “13107”, “19661”, “26214”, “32768”, “39321”,..., “58982”, “65535”. Is provided. Also, “9001” to “9010” of “combination pattern numbers” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  These combination pattern numbers “9001” to “9010” are set with different combinations of effect designs. For example, “left effect design“ L ””, “medium effect design“ C ””, “ The combination of the right performance symbol “R” is set differently. Specifically, in the combination pattern number “9007”, a combination of “6” for the left effect symbol “L”, “6” for the middle effect symbol “C”, and “7” for the right effect symbol “R” is set. Has been. Therefore, when this combination pattern number “9007” is selected, in the result display effect by the effect design, “6” is displayed in the left area, “6” is displayed in the middle area, and “6” is displayed in the right area. The effect design in which the number consisting of dot characters such as “7” is written is stopped. In addition, for the combination pattern number “9009”, combinations such as “8” for the left effect symbol “L”, “8” for the middle effect symbol “C”, and “9” for the right effect symbol “R” are set. A total of 10 different combination patterns are set for each combination pattern number.

[Produce pattern combination pattern selection table D for non-reach time effect at the time of loss]
This “effect design combination pattern selection table D for non-reach at the time of loss” has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “combination pattern number” are set and stored in order of 16 bits from the start address. is there. The “comparison value” includes, for example, 100 different values “73”, “146”, “218”, “291”, “364”, “437”,..., “65462”, “65535”. Is provided. Also, “combination pattern numbers” “10001” to “10900” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  These combination pattern numbers “10001” to “10900” are set with different combinations of effect designs. For example, “left effect design“ L ””, “middle effect design“ C ””, “ The combination of the right performance symbol “R” is set differently. Specifically, for the combination pattern number “10007”, combinations such as “0” for the left effect symbol “L”, “0” for the middle effect symbol “C”, and “7” for the right effect symbol “R” are set. Has been. Therefore, when this combination pattern number “10007” is selected, in the result display effect by the effect design, “0” is displayed in the left area, “0” is displayed in the middle area, and “0” is displayed in the right area. The effect design in which the number consisting of dot characters such as “7” is written is stopped. In addition, for the combination pattern number “10021”, combinations such as “0” for the left effect symbol “L”, “2” for the middle effect symbol “C”, and “3” for the right effect symbol “R” are set. A total of 900 different combination patterns are set for each combination pattern number.

  When the reference of the effect symbol combination pattern selection table in the above example (step S960, step S962, step S964, step S966) is completed, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S970.

[Refer to Fig. 69: Outward effect drawing lottery process]
Step S970: The effect control CPU 126 acquires an effect symbol random number. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 acquires the effect symbol combination pattern determination random number shifted in the previous effect random number update process (step S410 in FIG. 61). The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S972.

  Step S972: The effect control CPU 126 executes effect symbol lottery. Specifically, the effect symbol combination pattern determination random number acquired in the previous process (step S970) and the “effect” referred to in the same process (any one of step S960, step S962, step S964, or step S966). Based on the “comparison value” in the “symbol combination pattern selection table”, the combination pattern number of the effect symbol for the result display effect is determined (effect symbol stop eye selection means). Specifically, the obtained design symbol combination pattern determination random number value is sequentially compared with the “comparison value” in the above design symbol combination pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the comparison is made. Select the combination pattern number corresponding to the value.

  For example, the effect symbol combination pattern determination random number value at that time is “7777”, and “the effect symbol combination pattern selection table A for reaching at the time of loss” is shown as the effect symbol combination pattern selection table. In this case, the random number “7777” and the comparison value are sequentially compared from the beginning, and when the comparison value “7282” is compared, the random control value exceeds the comparison value. The comparison value “8010” is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the effect control CPU 126 selects “4011” as the corresponding combination pattern number.

  Step S974: The effect control CPU 126 executes the pattern setting of the effect symbol combination at the time of the result display effect. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126, based on the combination pattern number selected in the previous effect symbol lottery (step S972), the type of each effect symbol displayed on the display screen of the dot matrix LED display 42 at the result display effect. Set. For example, when “4011” is selected as the combination pattern number, the left effect pattern “L” in which the number “1” is written as a dot character in the left area in the display screen of the dot matrix LED display 42 during the result display effect. ”, A medium effect design“ C ”in which the number“ 2 ”is written in the middle region, and a right performance design“ R ”in which the number“ 1 ”is written in the right region is displayed in the right region. Set up. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S980.

  Step S980: The effect control CPU 126 determines whether or not to execute a turn effect. Specifically, the turn effect flag set in the previous step S904 or step S906 is referred to, and the determination is made based on whether or not the value of the turn effect flag is greater than zero. As a result of this determination, when it is determined that the roaring effect is to be executed (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S982. On the other hand, when it is determined not to execute the roaring effect (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the off-time variation effect pattern selection process (FIG. 67).

  Step S982: The effect control CPU 126 refers to the correction data table based on the turn effect flag. More specifically, the effect control CPU 126 stores the “sound effect start effect symbol correction data table” (correction data defining means) and the “sound effect end effect symbol correction data table” (correction data defining means) stored in the ROM 128. ), Correction data is selected based on the turn effect pattern number selected in the previous turn effect lottery process (step S904) (correction data selection means). In each correction data table, for each turn effect pattern number, from the combination of the effect designs at the time of the result display effect, the combination of effect designs for executing the effect of the turn (left effect design, middle effect design, right effect design) Correction data used for setting is recorded.

[Direction design correction data table at start of production]
FIG. 79 is a diagram showing an example of the effect symbol correction data table at the start of the accent effect.
For example, the “swing effect start effect symbol correction data table” includes “swing effect pattern number”, “left effect symbol correction”, “middle effect symbol correction”, and “right effect symbol correction” in order from the start address. It is a structure to store as a set. Note that not only one set is stored for one “swinging effect pattern number”, but there is also a “swinging effect pattern number” in which a plurality of sets are stored. The number of sets stored in is not limited to 25. In addition, when the “turning effect pattern number” in which a plurality of sets are stored is selected, the combination pattern set in the pattern setting (step S974) of the combination of effect symbols at the time of the lottery or the previous result display effect One is selected based on.

  In addition, “left effect symbol correction”, “middle effect symbol correction”, and “right effect symbol correction” are set for the roaring effect pattern numbers “1” to “25”, respectively. In these “left effect symbol correction”, “middle effect symbol correction”, and “right effect symbol correction”, data necessary for determining the mode and type of the effect symbol when the roaring effect is started is recorded. ing. Here, for each “effect symbol correction” stored, a corresponding correction value (“effect symbol correction value”) is stored in the ROM 128. For example, the left effect symbol correction value “01H” is stored in correspondence with the left effect symbol correction “1”. In addition, correction values such as “21H” corresponding to “+” and “31H” corresponding to “month” may be stored. In the following description, it is assumed that “effect design correction” and “effect design correction value” are the same.

  For example, in the set of the roaring effect pattern number “1”, contents such as “L” as the left effect symbol correction value, “variable display” as the middle effect symbol correction value, and “L-4” as the right effect symbol correction value, respectively. It is recorded. The content “L” of the left effect design correction value is the same type (number) as the left effect design “L” set in the pattern setting (step S974) of the effect design combination at the time of the previous result display effect. Represents. Therefore, the left effect symbol when the roaring effect is started is stopped and the left effect symbol “L” set in the pattern setting (step S974) of the effect symbol combination at the time of the previous result display effect is displayed. Represents the same type. For example, when the left effect symbol “L” set in the pattern setting (step S974) of the effect symbol combination at the time of the previous result display effect is “7”, the left effect symbol at the start of the roaring effect The number is “7”.

  Further, the content “variation display” of the medium effect symbol correction value indicates that the mode of the medium effect symbol when the roaring effect is started is not “stop display” but “variable display”. In addition, the content “L-4” of the right effect design correction value is four times before the left effect design “L” set in the pattern setting (step S974) of the effect design combination at the time of the previous result display effect. It represents the type (number). For example, when the left effect symbol “L” set in the pattern setting (step S974) of the effect symbol combination at the time of the previous result display effect is “7”, the right effect symbol at the start of the roaring effect is displayed. The number is “3” (7-4), and the left effect symbol “L” set in the pattern setting (step S974) of the effect symbol combination at the time of the previous result display effect is “1”. In this case, it is indicated that the number of the right effect symbol at the start of the roaring effect is “7”.

  For example, in the set of the roaring effect pattern number “13”, contents such as “L” as the left effect symbol correction value, “L” as the middle effect symbol correction value, and “L + 1” as the right effect symbol correction value are recorded. Yes. Similarly to the above, when the left effect symbol “L” set in the pattern setting of the effect symbol combination at the time of the previous result display effect (step S974) is “1”, the turn effect is started. The number of each of the effect designs indicates that the number “1” for the left effect design, “1” for the middle effect design, and “2” for the right effect design.

  For example, a plurality of sets are recorded for the turn effect pattern number “14” (in addition, “15” to “17”). Here, one of the sets is selected, but a specific set is selected in order to achieve consistency with the pattern set in the pattern setting (step S974) of the combination of effects in the previous result display effect. Is done. For example, in the pattern setting of the combination of effect symbols at the time of the previous result display effect (step S974), the left effect symbol “L” is “1”, the middle effect symbol “C” is “1”, and the right effect symbol “R”. When “2” is “2”, a set in which contents such as “3” as the left effect symbol correction value, “+” as the middle effect symbol correction value, and “8” as the right effect symbol correction value are selected. . In the same manner as described above, the numbers or letters of the respective production symbols when the production effect is started are the number “3” of the left production symbol, the number of the middle production symbol “+”, and the number of the right production design. This indicates that the number is “8”. Other,. For example, in the pattern setting of the combination of effect symbols at the previous result display effect (step S974), the left effect symbol “L” is “7”, the middle effect symbol “C” is “8”, and the right effect symbol “R”. Is “7”, a set in which contents such as “7” as the left effect symbol correction value, “3” as the middle effect symbol correction value, and “4” as the right effect symbol correction value are selected, respectively. The number or character of each production symbol when the production effect starts is that the number of the left production symbol is “7”, the number of the middle production design is “3”, and the number of the right production design is “4”. Represents.

  For example, a plurality of sets are also recorded in the turn effect pattern number “18”. Here, any set is selected. In this case, the set is selected by lottery. The lottery method may be selected with reference to a selection table (not shown) by using a random number, for example. By the lottery, for example, a set in which contents such as “L-4” as the left effect symbol correction value, “L-3” as the middle effect symbol correction value, and “L” as the right effect symbol correction value are selected is selected. The In this case, if the left effect symbol “L” set in the pattern setting (step S974) of the effect symbol combination at the time of the previous result display effect is “7”, each effect when the roaring effect is started The number of the symbol represents that the number “3” of the left effect symbol, the number of the middle effect symbol “4”, and the number of the right effect symbol “7”.

  For example, in the set of the roaring effect pattern number “22”, contents such as “6” as the left effect symbol correction value, “0” as the middle effect symbol correction value, and “5” as the right effect symbol correction value are recorded. Yes. When specific numbers are recorded in this way, even if the left effect symbol “L” set in the pattern setting (step S974) of the effect symbol combination at the previous result display effect is “1”, There is no effect on each production symbol when the production effect starts, and each number is “6” for the left production symbol, “0” for the middle production symbol, and “5” for the right production symbol. ".

[Direction design correction data table at the end of the production effect]
FIG. 80 is a diagram showing an example of the effect design correction data table at the end of the production effect.
For example, the “sounding effect end effect design correction data table” includes, for example, “skilling effect pattern number”, “left effect design correction value”, “middle effect design correction value”, “right effect design correction value” in order from the head address. "Is stored as a set. Note that there is not only one set of “swing effect pattern number” stored, but there is also a “swing effect pattern number” in which a plurality of sets are stored. The number of sets stored in is not limited to 25. Further, when the “turning effect pattern number” in which a plurality of sets are stored is selected, the set to be selected differs depending on whether or not the reach effect is executed.

  In addition, “left effect symbol correction value”, “middle effect symbol correction value”, and “right effect symbol correction value” are set for the roaring effect pattern numbers “1” to “25”, respectively. In these “left effect design correction value”, “middle effect design correction value”, and “right effect design correction value”, data necessary to determine the mode and type of the effect design when the roaring effect is terminated Is recorded.

  For example, in the set of the turn effect pattern number “1”, contents such as “L” as the left effect symbol correction value, “variable display” as the middle effect symbol correction value, and “R” as the right effect symbol correction value are recorded. ing. The content “L” of the left effect design correction value is the same type (number) as the left effect design “L” set in the pattern setting (step S974) of the effect design combination at the time of the previous result display effect. Represents. Therefore, the left effect symbol at the end of the roaring effect is stopped and displayed, and the type of the left effect symbol “L” set in the pattern setting (step S974) of the effect symbol combination at the time of the previous result display effect. Represents the same type. For example, if the left effect symbol “L” set in the pattern setting (step S974) of the effect symbol combination at the time of the previous result display effect is “7”, the left effect symbol at the end of the roaring effect The number is “7”.

  Further, the content “variation display” of the medium effect symbol correction value indicates that the mode of the medium effect symbol at the end of the roaring effect is not “stop display” but “variable display”. Further, the content “R” of the right effect design correction value is the same type (number) as the right effect design “R” set in the pattern setting (step S974) of the effect design combination at the time of the previous result display effect. Represents that. Therefore, the left effect symbol at the end of the roaring effect is stopped and displayed, and the right effect symbol “R” set in the pattern setting (step S974) of the effect symbol combination at the time of the previous result display effect. Represents the same type. For example, if the right effect symbol “R” set in the pattern setting (step S974) of the effect symbol combination at the time of the previous result display effect is “1”, the right effect symbol when the roaring effect ends is displayed. The number is “1”.

  For example, two sets are recorded in the turn effect pattern number “13”. Here, any set is selected. In this case, any set is selected depending on whether or not the reach effect is executed. When the reach effect is not executed, for example, a set in which contents such as “L” as the left effect symbol correction value, “C” as the middle effect symbol correction value, and “R” as the right effect symbol correction value are selected is selected. The In this case, the left effect symbol “L”, the middle effect symbol “C”, and the right effect symbol “R” set in the pattern setting (step S974) of the effect symbol combination at the time of the previous result display effect are applied as they are. It becomes. Therefore, after the end of the roaring effect, the variable display effect based on the effect design is ended and the result display effect is started. On the other hand, when the reach effect is executed, contents such as “L” as the left effect symbol correction value, “blank display” as the middle effect symbol correction value, and “R” as the right effect symbol correction value are recorded, for example. A set is selected. In the case where the left effect symbol “L” set in the pattern setting (step S974) of the effect symbol combination at the time of the previous result display effect is “7” and the right effect symbol “R” is “7”, The number or other of each effect symbol at the start of the roaring effect is “7” for the left effect symbol, nothing is displayed for the middle effect symbol, and the number for the right effect symbol is “7” Represents.

[Refer to Fig. 69: Outward effect drawing lottery process]
Step S984: The effect control CPU 126 executes the pattern setting of the combination of effect symbols at the start of the roaring effect. Specifically, the production control CPU 126 starts the production production based on the production production pattern number selected in the previous production production lottery (step S904) and the combination pattern number selected in the previous production design lottery (step S972). Sometimes, the type of each effect symbol displayed on the display screen of the dot matrix LED display 42 is set (effect symbol special stop eye setting means). For example, when “13” is selected as the ringing effect pattern number and “4011” is selected as the combination pattern number, the number “1” of the dot character in the left region in the display screen of the dot matrix LED display 42 is displayed at the start of the ringing effect. Left effect design with “L”, middle effect design “C” with dot character “1” in the middle area, and right effect with number “2” in dot character in the right area Set to display the symbol “R” (for example, “4” “4” “5” in the combination of numbers in FIG. 54 (B) replaced with “1” “1” “2”) .

  Step S986: The effect control CPU 126 executes a pattern setting of a combination of effect symbols at the end of the roaring effect. Specifically, the production control CPU 126 ends the production production based on the production production pattern number selected in the previous production production lottery (step S904) and the combination pattern number selected in the previous production design lottery (step S972). Sometimes, the type of each effect symbol displayed on the display screen of the dot matrix LED display 42 is set. For example, when “13” is selected as the ringing effect pattern number and “4011” is selected as the combination pattern number as in the process of step S984 above, the left in the display screen of the dot matrix LED display 42 is displayed at the end of the ringing effect. The left effect symbol “L” in which the number “1” is indicated by a dot character in the area, and the middle effect symbol “C” in which “blank” is displayed in the middle area (or the middle effect symbol “C”) is not displayed. The right effect design “R” in which the numeral “1” is written in the right area is displayed in the right area (for example, “4” in the combination of numbers in FIG. 54D). “Blank” “4” replaced with “1” “Blank” “1”).

  When the above processing is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the deviation variation effect pattern selection process (FIG. 67).

[Big hit variation pattern selection process]
FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the big hit hour variation effect pattern selection process (step S608 in FIG. 66). Each procedure will be described below.

  Step S1900: The effect control CPU 126 refers to the variation pattern command. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and refers to the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72.

  Step S1902: The production control CPU 126 determines whether or not the production effect can be executed. Specifically, the variation pattern command referred to in the previous step S1900 is analyzed, and it is determined whether or not there is sufficient variation time for executing the turning effect. At this time, if the reach effect is to be performed as a result of the analysis of the variation pattern command, it is determined whether or not the turn effect can be executed based on the time that the time required for the reach effect is omitted. judge. As a result of this determination, when it is determined that the roaring effect can be executed (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S1904. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is impossible to execute the roaring effect (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S1906.

  Step S1904: The effect control CPU 126 executes a turn effect lottery. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines a turn effect pattern number by lottery for the turn effect included in the variable display effect by the effect design. In some cases, the lottery may result in no effect. The rolling lottery pattern number distinguishes the type (pattern) of the variable display effect by the effect symbol, or corresponds to the change time required for the variable display effect.

  In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect effect pattern number on the basis of the effect effect pattern determination random number shifted in the effect effect random number update process (step S410 in FIG. 61) and the “effect effect pattern selection table”. . In the “buzzing effect pattern selection table”, an option that does not execute the buzzing effect and a plurality of options consisting of a buzzing effect pattern corresponding to a plurality of types of “buzzing effects” are defined, and any one of them is specified. It is selected not to execute the pattern or turn effect. In addition, a plurality of production effects may be defined, and the production times may be defined differently. In that case, a production effect pattern corresponding to the production time that does not fall within the variation time determined by the variation pattern command is not selected. You may control as follows. Note that the “swing effect pattern selection table” may be the same table as that referenced in step S904 in the previous variation effect pattern selection process (FIG. 67), or may be a table having a different content. Good. For example, there may be more types of roaring effect patterns to be selected than at the time of loss, or comparison values corresponding to the roaring effect patterns may be different at the time of loss and at the time of big hit.

  As described above, when the turn effect pattern number is selected by the turn effect lottery process, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S1907.

  Step S1906: The effect control CPU 126 resets the turn effect flag and sets the value to 0. That is, as described above, “0” is set as the turn effect flag to indicate that the turn effect is not executed. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S1907.

  Step S1907: The effect control CPU 126 executes other effect settings based on the effect symbols. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect table (not shown) and determines a change schedule (contents of the change display effect) of the effect symbol corresponding to the change effect pattern number and the turn effect pattern number at that time. In addition, when the re-lottery effect is executed, the change schedule is also determined. In this process, for example, a variable display effect other than the squeak effect by the effect design may be set. Note that the variable display effect related to the roaring effect may be set in the roaring effect selection. For example, when “5” is selected as the turn effect pattern number, combinations (“1”, “2”, “3”, “7”, “8”, and “9”) that make each effect symbol in order (or reverse order). (Or “7”, “6”, “5”, “3”, “2”, “1”), etc.), and then the variation display effect (so-called pseudo-continuous variation effect) is again displayed for all effect symbols. The display effect may be set when the turn effect is selected.

  Step S1908: The effect control CPU 126 executes a jackpot effect symbol lottery process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 includes the content of the stop display effect (for example, a combination pattern such as “5”-“5”-“5”), and the content at the time of temporary stop at the start of the roaring effect (for example, “1”-“ Combination pattern such as “Fluctuating” — “1”), and the combination pattern of the effect symbols such as the contents when temporarily stopping at the end of the roaring effect (for example, “5” — “Fluctuating” — “5” combination pattern) To decide. The specific processing content will be further described later using another flowchart.

  Step S1910: The effect control CPU 126 determines whether or not to execute a reach effect. Specifically, the variation pattern command referred to in the previous step S1900 is analyzed, and a determination is made based on whether or not the variation pattern is a reach effect. As a result of this determination, when it is determined that the reach effect is to be executed (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S1912. On the other hand, when it is determined not to execute the reach effect (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol variation pre-processing (FIG. 66).

  Step S1912: The effect control CPU 126 sets a reach effect. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 refers to a reach pattern selection table (not shown) based on the turn effect flag or the like, and sets the reach effect corresponding to the change pattern command at that time (determination of the type (content) of reach effect), Schedule setting). When the installation of the reach effect ends, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol fluctuation pre-process (FIG. 66).

[Large lottery drawing design process]
FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the big hit effect design lottery process (step S1908 in FIG. 81). Each procedure will be described below.

  Step S1952: The effect control CPU 126 determines whether or not the probability state designation value = 1 and the 16 round symbols = 1. Specifically, the stop control command and the probability state specified value command received by the effect control CPU 126 in the previous command receiving process (step S400) and stored in the command buffer area of the RAM 130 are analyzed, and the probability state specified value = 1 and It is determined whether 16 round symbols = 1. As a result of this determination, if the probability state designation value = 1 and the 16 round symbols = 1 (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step 1954. On the other hand, if the probability state designation value = 1 and the 16 round symbols = 1 are not satisfied (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step 1956.

  Step S1954: The effect control CPU 126 refers to the jackpot effect symbol combination pattern selection table A. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 displays the “effect at the time of the big hit” stored in the ROM 128 when the variable display effect is the effect at the time of the big hit and the probability state designation value = 1 and the 16 round symbols = 1. Reference is made to the symbol combination pattern selection table A ”. In the “effect symbol combination pattern selection table A at the time of a big hit”, two types of effect symbol combination patterns to be displayed in the result display effect by the effect symbols are defined in advance. Here, the combination pattern of this effect design is not limited to two types, and may be one type or a plurality of types. The contents of “effect symbol combination pattern selection table A at the time of big hit” will be further described later with reference to another drawing. When the reference to the big hit effect symbol combination pattern selection table A is completed, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S1970.

  Step S1956: The effect control CPU 126 refers to the jackpot effect symbol combination pattern selection table B. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 stores the “effect at the time of big hit” stored in the ROM 128 when the variable display effect is an effect at the time of big hit and the probability state designation value = 1 and 16 round symbols = 1. Reference is made to the symbol combination pattern selection table B. In the “effect symbol combination pattern selection table B at the time of big hit”, a plurality of types of effect symbol combination patterns to be displayed at the time of the result display effect by the effect symbols are defined in advance. The contents of the “effect symbol combination pattern selection table B at the big hit” will be further described later with reference to another drawing. When the reference to the big hit design symbol combination pattern selection table B is completed, the production control CPU 126 next executes step S1970.

[Direction design combination pattern selection table A at the time of big hit]
FIG. 83 shows the effect symbol combination pattern selection table A at the time of big hit.
This “effect design combination pattern selection table A at the time of big hit” has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “combination pattern number” are set and stored in order of 16 bits from the start address. In the “comparison value”, for example, two different values “32768” and “65535” are provided. Further, “1” to “2” of “combination pattern numbers” are assigned to the respective “comparison values”.

  These combination pattern numbers “1” and “2” are set with different combinations of effect designs. For example, “left effect design“ L ””, “middle effect design“ C ””, “ The combination of the right performance symbol “R” is set differently. Specifically, for the combination pattern number “1”, a combination of “3” for the left effect symbol “L”, “3” for the middle effect symbol “C”, and “3” for the right effect symbol “R” is set. Has been. Therefore, when this combination pattern number “1” is selected, in the result display effect by effect design, “3” is displayed in the left area, “3” in the middle area, and “3” in the right area. The effect design in which the number consisting of dot characters such as “3” is written is stopped. In addition, the combination pattern number “2” is set such that the left effect symbol “L” is “7”, the middle effect symbol “C” is “7”, and the right effect symbol “R” is “7”. ing.

[Direction design combination pattern selection table B at big hit]
FIG. 84 is a diagram showing the effect symbol combination pattern selection table B at the time of big hit.
This “effect design combination pattern selection table B at the time of big hit” has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “combination pattern number” are set and stored 16 bits each in order from the head address. In the “comparison value”, for example, eight different values “8192”, “16384”, “24576”, “32768”, “40959”, “49151”, “57343”, “65535” are provided. ing. Also, “combination pattern numbers” “11” to “18” are assigned to the respective “comparison values”.

  These combination pattern numbers “11” to “18” are set with different combinations of effect designs. For example, “left effect design“ L ””, “middle effect design“ C ””, “ The combination of the right performance symbol “R” is set differently. Specifically, for the combination pattern number “11”, combinations such as “0” for the left effect symbol “L”, “0” for the middle effect symbol “C”, and “0” for the right effect symbol “R” are set. Has been. Therefore, when this combination pattern number “11” is selected, in the result display effect by effect design, “0” is displayed in the left area, “0” is displayed in the middle area, and “0” is displayed in the right area. The effect design in which the number consisting of dot characters such as “0” is written is stopped. In addition, for the combination pattern number “12”, combinations such as “1” for the left effect symbol “L”, “1” for the middle effect symbol “C”, and “1” for the right effect symbol “R” are set. A total of eight different combination patterns are set for each combination pattern number.

[Refer to Fig. 82: Effect design lottery process for big hits]
Step S1970: The effect control CPU 126 acquires an effect symbol random number. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 acquires the effect symbol combination pattern determination random number shifted in the previous effect random number update process (step S410 in FIG. 61). The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S1972.

  Step S1972: The effect control CPU 126 executes effect symbol lottery. Specifically, the effect symbol combination pattern determination random number obtained in the previous process (step S1970) and the “designation pattern combination pattern selection table” referred to in the previous process (step S1954 or step S1956). Based on the “comparison value”, the combination pattern number of the effect symbol at the time of the result display effect is determined. Specifically, the obtained design symbol combination pattern determination random number value is sequentially compared with the “comparison value” in the above design symbol combination pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the comparison is made. Select the combination pattern number corresponding to the value.

  For example, if the effect symbol combination pattern determination random value at that time is “17777” and “effect effect combination pattern selection table B at the big hit” is referred to as the effect symbol combination pattern selection table, the random value “ 17777 "and the comparison value are sequentially compared from the beginning. When the comparison value is compared with the comparison value" 16384 ", since the random value exceeds the comparison value, the effect control CPU 126 sets the next comparison value" 24576 "and the random value. Compare. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the effect control CPU 126 selects “13” as the corresponding combination pattern number.

  Step S1974: The effect control CPU 126 executes the pattern setting of the effect symbol combination at the time of the result display effect. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126, based on the combination pattern number selected in the previous effect symbol lottery (step S1972), the type of each effect symbol displayed on the display screen of the dot matrix LED display 42 during the result display effect. Set. For example, when “13” is selected as the combination pattern number, the left effect pattern “L” in which the number “2” is written as a dot character in the left area in the display screen of the dot matrix LED display 42 in the result display effect. ”, A medium effect design“ C ”in which the number“ 2 ”is written in the middle area, and a right performance design“ R ”in which the number“ 2 ”is written in the right area is displayed in the right area. Set up. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S1976.

  Step S1976: The effect control CPU 126 determines whether or not to execute the re-lottery effect. Specifically, it is determined based on the re-lottery effect execution determination random number shifted in the previous effect random number update process (step S410 in FIG. 61) and a re-lottery effect execution selection table (not shown). Therefore, based on this lottery result, it is determined whether or not a re-lottery effect is executed. As a result of this determination, when it is determined that the re-lottery effect is to be executed (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S1977. On the other hand, when it is determined not to execute the re-lottery effect (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S1980.

  Step S1977: The effect control CPU 126 refers to the re-lottery effect effect symbol combination pattern selection table. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol combination pattern for the re-lottery effect at the time of big hit stored in the ROM 128 when the variable display effect is the effect at the time of the big hit and executes the re-lottery effect. See Table. In the “effect drawing combination pattern selection table for the re-lottery effect at the time of the big hit”, the effect symbols displayed at the start of the re-lottery effect (preliminary result display effect) executed before the result display effect by the effect symbols are displayed. A plurality of types of combination patterns are defined in advance.

[Direction pattern combination pattern selection table for re-lottery effect at big hit]
FIG. 85 is a diagram showing an example of a re-lottery effect effect symbol combination pattern selection table at the time of a big hit.
The “effect drawing combination pattern selection table for re-lottery effect at the time of big hit” has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “combination pattern number” are set and stored in order of 16 bits from the start address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, ten different values “6554”, “13107”, “19661”, “26214”, “32768”, “39321”, “45876”, “52428”, “58982”. ”,“ 65535 ”. In addition, “combination pattern numbers” “51” to “60” are assigned to the respective “comparison values”.

  These combination pattern numbers “51” to “60” are set with different combinations of effect designs. For example, “left effect design“ L ””, “medium effect design“ C ””, “ The combination of the right performance symbol “R” is set differently. Specifically, the combination pattern number “51” is set such that the left effect symbol “L” is “0”, the middle effect symbol “C” is “0”, and the right effect symbol “R” is “0”. Has been. Therefore, when this combination pattern number “51” is selected, “0” is displayed in the left area of the display screen, and “ An effect design in which a number consisting of dot characters such as “0” and “0” in the right area is stopped. In addition, for the combination pattern number “57”, combinations such as “6” for the left effect symbol “L”, “6” for the middle effect symbol “C”, and “6” for the right effect symbol “R” are set. A total of 10 different combination patterns are set for each combination pattern number.

  When the redraw lottery effect design symbol combination pattern selection table has been referred to, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S1978.

  Step S1978: The effect control CPU 126 executes a re-lottery effect effect symbol lottery. Specifically, the re-lottery effect design combination pattern determination random number shifted in the previous effect random number update process (step S410 in FIG. 61) and the re-lottery effect effect symbol combination pattern referred to in the previous process (step S1977). Based on the “comparison value” in the selection table, the combination pattern number of the effect symbol at the start of the re-lottery effect is determined. Specifically, the re-lottery effect design combination pattern determination random number value is sequentially compared with the “comparison value” in the effect design combination pattern selection table, and if the random value is less than or equal to the comparison value, A combination pattern number corresponding to the comparison value is selected.

  For example, if the effect symbol combination pattern determination random number value at that time is “17777”, and “effect symbol combination pattern selection table for re-lottery effect at the time of big hit” is referenced as the effect symbol combination pattern selection table, The numerical value “17777” and the comparison value are sequentially compared from the beginning, and when compared with the comparison value “13107”, the random number value exceeds the comparison value, so the presentation control CPU 126 obtains the next comparison value “19661”. Compare random values. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the effect control CPU 126 selects “53” as the corresponding combination pattern number.

  Step S1979: The effect control CPU 126 executes the pattern setting of the effect symbol combination at the time of the temporary result display effect (at the start of the re-lottery effect). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 displays within the display screen of the dot matrix LED display 42 at the start of the re-lottery effect based on the combination pattern number selected in the previous re-lottery effect effect symbol lottery (step S1978). Set the type of each design. For example, when “53” is selected as the combination pattern number, the left effect symbol “2” written as a dot character in the left region in the display screen of the dot matrix LED display 42 at the start of the re-lottery effect “ “L”, a medium effect design “C” in which the number “2” is indicated by a dot character in the middle region, and a right effect design “R” in which the number “2” is indicated by a dot character in the right region are displayed. Make settings. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S1980.

  Step S1980: The effect control CPU 126 determines whether or not to execute a turn effect. Specifically, the turn effect flag set in the previous step S1904 or step S1906 is referred to, and the determination is made based on whether or not the value of the turn effect flag is greater than zero. As a result of this determination, when it is determined that the roaring effect is to be executed (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S1982. On the other hand, when it is determined not to execute the roaring effect (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the big hit hour variation effect pattern selection process (FIG. 81).

  Step S1982: The effect control CPU 126 refers to the correction data table based on the turn effect flag. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 refers to the “sounding effect start effect symbol correction data table” and “swing effect end effect symbol correction data table” stored in the ROM 128. In each correction data table, for each turn effect pattern number, from the combination of the effect designs at the time of the result display effect, the combination of effect designs for executing the effect of the turn (left effect design, middle effect design, right effect design) Correction data used for setting is recorded. Note that the “sounding effect start effect symbol correction data table” (FIG. 79) and the “sounding effect end effect symbol correction data table” (FIG. 80) are the same as those at the time of disconnection, and thus the description thereof is omitted. To do.

  Step S1984: The effect control CPU 126 executes the pattern setting of the combination of effect symbols at the start of the roaring effect. Specifically, the production control CPU 126 selects the turn production pattern number selected in the previous production production lottery (step S1904), the combination pattern number selected in the previous production design lottery (step S1972), and the previous reproduction. Based on the combination pattern number selected in the lottery effect design symbol lottery (step S1972), the type of each design symbol displayed in the display screen of the dot matrix LED display 42 at the start of the re-lottery effect is set. For example, when “13” is selected as the turn effect pattern number and “2” and “56” are selected as the combination pattern numbers, dot characters are displayed in the left region in the display screen of the dot matrix LED display 42 at the start of the turn effect. The left effect symbol “L” with the number “5”, the middle effect symbol “C” with the dot character “5” in the middle area, and the dot character “6” in the right area with the dot character “5”. The displayed right effect symbol “R” is set to be displayed (for example, “4”, “4”, “5” in the combination of numbers in FIG. 54 (B) is changed to “5”, “5”, “6”). Replaced with). If “56” is not selected as the combination pattern number, but only “2” is selected, a dot character in the left area in the display screen of the dot matrix LED display 42 at the start of the roaring effect is displayed. The left effect symbol “L” with “7” written, the middle effect symbol “C” with the dot character “7” written in the middle region, and the number “8” with the dot character written in the right region The right effect design “R” is displayed (for example, “4” “4” “5” in the combination of numbers in FIG. 54 (B) is replaced with “7” “7” “8”. )

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, whether or not to execute an effect on a variation display effect content of an effect symbol performed during the variable symbol display is determined in advance, and then the symbol stop display is performed. Since the combination of the effect symbols in the result display effect of the effect symbols performed in the middle can be determined, the roaring effect can be executed without depending on the combination pattern of the effect symbols in the result display effect. In addition, since it is determined whether or not to execute the roaring effect before deciding the combination of effects in the result display effect, it is not necessary to limit the roaring effect, and various roaring effects are selected and executed. be able to.

  In addition, after it is decided to execute the roaring effect, the combination of effect symbols at the time of the result display effect is determined, and based on the combination of effect symbols at the result display effect, the combination of the effect symbols at the start of the roaring effect is determined Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the inconsistency in the combination of effect symbols at the time of the result display effect or the start of the reach effect and the start of the turn effect.

  Further, when setting the combination pattern of the effect design at the time of the result display effect, a combination pattern selection table of the effect design at the time of the result display effect (corresponding to the effect effect pattern number) related to the sound effect selected in the lottery is previously stored. Since a plurality of rules are defined, it is possible to simplify the combination pattern selection process of effect symbols. Furthermore, since the correction data related to the roaring effect selected in the lottery is specified in advance at the time of setting the effect pattern combination pattern at the start of the roaring effect, a new effect symbol combination pattern selection table must be specified. Rather, it can be set simply by correcting the combination of effects.

[Second Embodiment]
The second embodiment of the present invention is different from the above-described embodiment (hereinafter referred to as the first embodiment) in the variation effect pattern selection process. Specifically, in the first embodiment, when selecting a turn effect in the change effect pattern selection process (step S904 in FIG. 67 or step S1904 in FIG. 81), whether or not the reach effect is executed. The turn effect pattern selection table (FIG. 68) was referenced. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, different turn effect pattern selection tables are referred to when the reach effect is executed and when the reach effect is executed. In the following, the variation effect pattern selection process at the time of loss in the second embodiment will be specifically described, but the same process (after step S904) as in the first embodiment will be omitted. Although the description is limited to the variation effect pattern selection process at the time of loss, the processing of steps S903a to S903c described below is added to the variation effect pattern selection process at the time of big hit at a stage before step S1904. Since the second embodiment can be realized by this, the description is omitted.

[Extraction variation pattern selection processing in the second embodiment]
FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the off-time variation effect pattern selection process (step S612 in FIG. 66) in the second embodiment. Each procedure will be described below.

  Step S900: The effect control CPU 126 refers to the variation pattern command. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and refers to the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72.

  Step S902: The production control CPU 126 determines whether or not the production effect can be executed. Specifically, the variation pattern command referred to in the previous step S900 is analyzed, and it is determined whether or not there is a sufficient variation time for executing the turning effect. At this time, if the reach effect is to be performed as a result of the analysis of the variation pattern command, it is determined whether or not the turn effect can be executed based on the time that the time required for the reach effect is omitted. judge. As a result of this determination, when it is determined that the roaring effect can be executed (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S903a. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is impossible to execute the roaring effect (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S906.

  Step S903a: The effect control CPU 126 determines whether or not to execute the reach effect. Specifically, the variation pattern command referred to in the previous step S900 is analyzed, and a determination is made based on whether or not the variation pattern is a reach effect. As a result of this determination, when it is determined that the reach effect is to be executed (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S903b. On the other hand, if it is determined not to execute the reach effect (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S903c.

  Step S903b: The effect control CPU 126 refers to the reach effect pattern selection table for reach. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 refers to the “reaching effect pattern selection table for reach” stored in the ROM 128 when executing the reach effect during the variable display effect. In this “reaching effect pattern selection table for reach”, there are defined a plurality of options consisting of options that do not execute the scoring effect and scoring effect patterns corresponding to multiple types of “scoring effects”. It is selected not to execute the turn effect pattern or turn effect. The contents of the “reaching effect pattern selection table for reach” will be further described later with reference to another drawing. When the reference for the reach effect pattern selection table is completed, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S904.

  Step S903c: The effect control CPU 126 refers to the non-reach time effect effect pattern selection table. Specifically, when the reach control CPU 126 does not execute the reach effect during the variable display effect, the effect control CPU 126 refers to the “non-reach time effect effect pattern selection table” stored in the ROM 128. In this “non-reach squeezing effect pattern selection table”, there are defined a plurality of options including an option not to execute a squealing effect and a squeezing effect pattern corresponding to multiple types of squealing effects. It is selected not to execute any turn effect pattern or turn effect. The contents of the “non-reach turn effect pattern selection table” will be described later with reference to another drawing. When the reference of the non-reach-time turning effect pattern selection table is completed, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S904.

[Example of the table for selecting the production pattern for reaching for reach]
FIG. 87 is a diagram showing an example of a reach production effect pattern selection table in the second embodiment. Since the detailed contents are the same as those of the turn effect pattern selection table of FIG. 68, description thereof is omitted.
This reach production pattern selection table for a reach has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “skill production pattern number” are stored in a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, 26 different values “50”, “54”, “58”, “62”, “66”, “70”,..., “253”, “255”. Is provided. Also, “0” to “25” of “buzzing effect pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 87, the content of the turn production corresponding to the turn production pattern number “0” is “no turn production” and the comparison value is “50”, so that the comparison value is about 20% ( 51/256) probability. In other words, when the special symbol variation display is performed five times, it means that the turning effect is not performed once. Similarly, when other roaring effect pattern numbers are selected, the probability that each roaring effect is selected during the special symbol variation display is about 1. for the roaring effect pattern numbers “1” to “6”. 6%, about 7% for "7" to "10", about 6% for "11" to "13", about 4% for "14" to "17", about "18" and "19" About 1.6%, “20” to “23” is about 1.2%, and “24” and “25” are about 0.8%.

[Drilling pattern selection table for non-reach]
FIG. 88 is a diagram showing an example of a non-reach-time turn-around effect pattern selection table in the second embodiment.
This non-reach-time turning effect pattern selection table has a structure in which, for example, a “comparison value” and a “turning effect pattern number” are set and stored in units of 1 byte in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, 26 different values “50”, “69”, “88”, “107”, “125”, “143”,..., “254”, “255”. Is provided. Also, “0” to “25” of “buzzing effect pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 88, the content of the turn production corresponding to the turn production pattern number “0” is “no turn over production” and the comparison value is “50”, so that the comparison value is about 20% ( 51/256) probability. That is, as described in the “reaching effect pattern selection table for reach”, when the special symbol variation display is performed five times, it is indicated that the accent effect is not performed once. . Therefore, even if the reach effect is executed or not executed, it indicates that the turn effect is not performed once in 5 times. Similarly, in the case where other roaring effect pattern numbers are selected, the probability that each roaring effect is selected during the special symbol variation display is about 7 for the roaring effect pattern numbers “1” to “6”. 4%, about 7% for "7" to "10", about 0.8% for "11" to "17", about 0.4% for "18" to "25" Show.

  Here, when compared with the “reaching effect pattern selection table for reach”, when the reach effect pattern numbers “1” to “6” are not executed, the probability is about 7.4%. On the other hand, when the reach effect is executed, it is selected with a probability of about 1.6%. In addition, when the reach effect pattern numbers “11” to “17” are selected with a probability of about 0.8% when the reach effect is not executed, they are about 6% when the reach effect is executed. Or it is selected with a probability of about 4%. Therefore, the probability of whether or not the reach effect is executed according to the selected roaring effect, that is, whether or not the effect symbol is in the tempered state (reach state) is different. In this way, the fun of the game can be improved by changing the degree of expectation that it may become a tempered state due to the roaring effect.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be implemented with various modifications. The aspect of the effect mentioned in one embodiment is an example, and is not limited to the aspect of the effect described above.

  The images given in other production examples are merely examples, and these can be appropriately modified. Further, the structure, board surface configuration, specific numerical values, various modes and the like of the pachinko machine 1 are preferable examples including those shown in the drawings, and it goes without saying that these can be appropriately modified.

  In the above-described embodiment, the pre-reading effect using the effect symbol has been described as an example executed in the rush mode, but may be executed in other modes.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 8 Game board 8a Game area 20 Start gate 26 Upper start prize port 28 Variable start prize device 28a Lower start prize port 33 Normal symbol display device 33a Normal symbol operation memory lamp 34 1st special symbol display device 35 2nd special symbol Display device 34a First special symbol operation memory lamp 35a Second special symbol operation memory lamp 38 Game state display device 42 Dot matrix LED display 45 Effect switching button 70 Main control device 72 Main control CPU
74 ROM
76 RAM
124 Production control device 126 Production control CPU

Claims (6)

A lottery execution means for executing an internal lottery and the condition that a predetermined lottery trigger occurs during the game,
When the internal lottery is executed by the lottery execution means, the symbol display means for displaying the symbols in a manner representing the result of the internal lottery after the symbols are variably displayed over a predetermined fluctuation time triggered by this ,
When the symbol display is performed by the symbol display means, the symbol display is performed after the symbol display is performed to display a plurality of effect symbols that are combined with each other in correspondence with the symbol variation display within the variation time. A symbol effect execution means for executing a result display effect to stop and display all of the plurality of effect symbols in an overall combination mode corresponding to the symbol stop display mode by means;
A variation display effect pattern defining means for preliminarily defining a plurality of variable display effect patterns including a special variation display effect pattern for the pattern of the variation display effect by the symbol effect execution means;
A variable display effect pattern for selecting any one of the plurality of variable display effect patterns defined by the variable display effect pattern defining means for the variable display effects of the plurality of effect symbols by the symbol effect executing means. A selection means;
If the special variable display effect pattern is selected by the variable display presentation pattern selecting means, wherein during execution of by that said variable display effect on the symbol demonstration execution unit, using at least a portion of the plurality of the performance symbols A special variation display effect executing means for starting a variable display effect of the plurality of effect symbols again after executing a specific stop display effect during change to a stop display state on the effect in an intermediate combination mode;
With respect to the result display effect executed using the overall combination aspect constituted by all of the plurality of effect symbols by the symbol effect execution means, the combination pattern of the effect symbols constituting the overall combination aspect is previously set. Production symbol stop eye defining means for defining multiple ways,
Regarding the variable display effect executed by the symbol effect execution means, after the selection of the variable display effect pattern by the variable display effect pattern selection means, the combination of the effect symbols constituting the overall combination aspect in the result display effect A gaming machine comprising: an effect symbol stop eye selecting means for selecting any one of a plurality of combinations of patterns defined by the effect symbol stop eye defining means. In the gaming machine according to claim 1,
When the special variable display effect pattern is selected by the variable display effect pattern selecting unit when the variable display effect is executed by the symbol effect executing unit, the special variable display effect executing unit executes the special display effect. About the combination pattern of the effect symbols constituting the intermediate combination aspect of the specific stop display effect during change, for each effect symbol constituting the combination pattern of the effect symbols selected by the effect symbol stop eye selection means A gaming machine further comprising production symbol special stop eye setting means for setting a type as a new combination pattern of the production symbols reorganized based on the special variable display production pattern. The gaming machine according to claim 2,
The variable display effect pattern defining means is:
A plurality of types of the special variable display effect patterns are defined in advance in a plurality of variable display effect patterns,
The contents of the correction data used for the reorganization of the types of effect symbols constituting the effect symbol combination pattern by the effect symbol special stop eye setting means are individually associated with a plurality of types of the special variable display effect patterns. Correction data prescribing means for prescribing a plurality of ways in advance,
When the variable display effect pattern selection unit selects any of the types of the special variable display effect pattern at the start of the variable display effect executed by the symbol effect execution unit, the correction data defining unit defines Correction data selection means for selecting correction data having contents corresponding to the type of the special variation display effect pattern selected from the plurality of correction data.
The effect design special stop eye setting means,
Based on the content of the correction data selected by the correction data selection means, the types of effect symbols constituting the combination pattern of the effect symbols selected by the effect symbol stop eye selection means are reorganized and new A gaming machine set as a combination pattern of the effect symbols. The gaming machine according to claim 3,
The correction data defining means includes
A new combination pattern of the effect symbols set by the reorganization of each effect symbol type by the effect symbol special stop eye setting means and the combination pattern of the effect symbols selected by the effect symbol stop eye selection means are mutually connected. The normal correction data that is different from each other is defined, and the effect symbol special stop eye setting means sets a new combination pattern of the effect symbols set by reorganizing each effect symbol type and the effect symbol stop eye selection means. A gaming machine, characterized in that special correction data that is the same as the combination pattern of the selected effect symbols is defined together. In the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
The effect design stop eye selection means,
When selecting the combination pattern of the effect symbols constituting the overall combination aspect in the result display effect, the effect symbol stop eye is based on the special variable display effect pattern selected by the variable display effect pattern selection means. A gaming machine that selects any one of a plurality of combinations of patterns defined by the defining means and having a relationship with the special variation display effect pattern. In the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
Fluctuation pattern defining means that preliminarily defines a variation pattern of the variation display of the symbol by the symbol display means;
A variation pattern determining means for selectively determining any one variation pattern from a plurality of variation patterns defined by the variation pattern defining means when starting the variation display of the symbol by the symbol display means;
When the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determination unit satisfies a predetermined reach generation condition, the variation pattern determination unit further includes a reach effect execution unit that executes a reach effect during execution of the variation display effect by the symbol effect execution unit,
When the predetermined special variable display effect pattern is selected by the variable display effect pattern selecting unit, the probability selected when the reach effect is scheduled to be executed by the reach effect executing unit, and the reach effect executing unit According to the gaming machine, the probability selected when the reach effect is not scheduled to be executed is different.

Images